JP2015186635A - A game system, game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system in which modes are changed variously by a coordination of a game device and a game machine.SOLUTION: A game system includes: an enclosed type game machine; and a game device that adds holding points by using game values and that is communicably connected to the game machine. The game device includes transmission means for mode changeover command information, the means transmitting a mode change demand to the game machine. The game machine includes mode changeover means for changing over, on the basis of the received mode changeover command information, either to a business mode in which players can perform the game or a non-business mode. The mode changeover means changes over to a non-business mode based on the mode changeover command information, among a plurality of kinds of non-business modes including a maintenance mode in which parameters used for collecting the game history data of players in a business mode can be set and a test mode in which the normality of motion can be confirmed for each part by partially operating the game machine.

Description

  The present invention is a game machine that can be played with points and adds points according to the occurrence of winnings, and adds points using game values owned by the player and communicates with the gaming machines. The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming device that can be connected, and the gaming machine.

  As a conventional gaming system of this type, there is known a gaming system including an encapsulated ball pachinko machine and a gaming device that is communicably connected to the pachinko machine.

  Prior art document 1 describes a game hall management system that manages data by distinguishing data in the trial hit mode from data in business in relation to this type of conventional gaming system. In this game hall management system, the management device operates based on a ball lending signal output from a pedestrian machine adjacent to the gaming machine, and operates as a test whether the corresponding installed gaming machine is operating as a business. And is divided into business data and trial hit data based on the determination result and stored.

JP 2008-289639 A

  However, this type of conventional gaming system has a problem in that it cannot perform a process in which the platform machine and the gaming machine are switched to various modes in cooperation with each other.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and the purpose of the present invention is to increase the degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine by switching the gaming device and the gaming machine to various modes. An object is to provide a high gaming system and a gaming machine used in the gaming system.

(1) The present invention allows a game with points (number of game balls, points), an enclosed game machine having a circulation path through which game points are added according to the occurrence of winnings and the game medium is circulated (P units, S units) and a gaming device (CU) that is connected to the gaming machine while adding points using gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player A gaming system comprising:
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmitting means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
Based on the received mode switching command information, the gaming machine has a sales mode in which the player can play a game (a sales mode for providing a game to the player) and a non-business mode (FIG. 8 to FIG. 8). 10; Mode switching means for switching to any one of maintenance mode, test mode, and trial hit mode (FIGS. 11, 73, 80, and 96; payout control unit 17, main control board 16, display control board 53) Including
The mode switching means includes a maintenance mode (see FIG. 8) in which parameters for collecting game history data of a player in the sales mode can be set, and a normal operation by partially operating the gaming machine. Among a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode (see FIG. 9) that can be confirmed for each part, the mode is switched to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming device and changes the mode, the gaming device has a high degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching. System can be provided. Moreover, by switching to the maintenance mode, it becomes possible to set parameters when collecting game history data of the player in the sales mode, and by switching to the test mode, the gaming machine is partially operated to change the normality of the operation. It is possible to check each part.

(2) The present invention is provided with a connection unit for communicably connecting to a gaming device that adds points using game values (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player, It is an enclosed type gaming machine (P units, S units) having a circulation path in which the points are added according to the occurrence of a prize and the game medium is circulated.
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information (mode change request) from the gaming device;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, based on the received mode switching command information, a business mode in which a player can play a game (game to the player) Mode switching means (FIG. 11, FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96; payout) for switching between the business mode for providing) and the non-business mode (FIGS. 8 to 10; maintenance mode, test mode, trial hit mode) Control unit 17, main control board 16, display control board for display 53),
The mode switching means includes a maintenance mode (see FIG. 8) in which parameters can be set when collecting game data of the player in the sales mode, and the normality of the operation by partially operating the gaming machine. Of a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode (see FIG. 9) that can be confirmed for each part, the mode is switched to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having a high degree of cooperation with the gaming apparatus with respect to mode switching in order to receive the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and change the mode. It becomes. Moreover, by switching to the maintenance mode, it becomes possible to set parameters when collecting game history data of the player in the sales mode, and by switching to the test mode, the gaming machine is partially operated to change the normality of the operation. It is possible to check each part.

(3) In the gaming system according to (1),
The mode switching means switches to the test mode on condition that a gaming device for test mode is connected to the gaming machine (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a normal gaming device used at the time of business operation from being erroneously switched to the test mode in a state where the gaming machine is connected to the gaming machine and a game is provided to the player.

(4) In the gaming system according to (1) (3),
A test game for confirming the collection status of game history data based on the setting parameters in the maintenance mode is possible (see FIG. 8),
The mode switching means does not switch from the maintenance mode to another mode until the result of the test game is determined (see FIG. 8; end condition).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched in a state where the result of the test game is indeterminate, and the switched previous mode is influenced by the previous indeterminate amount.

(5) In the gaming system according to (4),
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means (game history data storage unit in non-business mode) for storing game history data based on the test game in the maintenance mode;
Game history initialization means (see FIG. 8) for initializing the storage of the game history data storage means when the maintenance mode is switched to another mode.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history in the maintenance mode affects the game history in the previous mode switched from the maintenance mode.

(6) In the gaming system according to (1) (3) (4) (5),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter in FIG. 6, addition counter, subtraction counter in FIG. 104) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information transmitting means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information;
The mode switching command information transmission means transmits mode switching command information for instructing switching to the maintenance mode on the condition that no score is stored in the score storage means (see FIGS. 8 and 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, since the switching command to the maintenance mode is performed on the condition that there is no score storage, when the player has a score and the player is playing, the business mode is erroneously changed from the sales mode. The inconvenience of switching to the maintenance mode can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming system according to (6),
The update information transmitting means does not transmit the update information to the gaming device in the non-business mode (see FIGS. 8 to 10).

  According to such a configuration, in the non-business mode, it is not necessary to manage update information on the gaming device side, so the management burden on the gaming device side can be reduced.

(8) In the gaming system according to (1) (3) to (7),
In the test mode, it is possible to individually check the operation of the game medium launching mechanism, the holding point display mechanism for displaying the holding points, and the game medium moving mechanism (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to individually check the malfunction of the gaming machine by using the test mode.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating test mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating non-business mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transfer conditions to each mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown by FIG. 13, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power supply starting, (b) is at the time of game machine power supply starting. This is an authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the mutual authentication sequence shown by Fig.14 (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown by FIG.14 (b). 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of a BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the CU communication control part serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to the EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a pachinko machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of subtracting the number of game balls according to an instruction on the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a game is interrupted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the lock | rock of the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the cell (front frame) 6 of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when a power supply is started in the state where a card unit is holding a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach | attain a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation response from a pachinko machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not reach | attain a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction from a card unit (response to an addition request) does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the subtraction rejection response with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a rejection of a clear with respect to the clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of permission rejection with respect to the game permission request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of prohibition refusal with respect to the game prohibition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door opening rejection with respect to the glass door opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a cell (front frame) opening rejection with respect to the cell (front frame) opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before the operation instruction is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the control processing in case a communication other party is inconsistent in the recovery at the time of the CU side power failure generation | occurrence | production shown in FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a control process when communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption shown in FIG. 51. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power failure shown in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs illustrated in FIG. 56. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 57 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 60 occurs. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption illustrated in FIG. 61. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 65 occurs. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of a game ball number counter. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process regarding the in-game ball number counter which the P payout control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process regarding the floating ball which the main control part of CU performs. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and the payout control part when an addition request | requirement generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and the payout control part when a subtraction request | requirement generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the payout control part when an operation mode request | requirement generate | occur | produces. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the sequence number between the main control board and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of power activation, and a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part and the main control board in a game. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of operation mode switching, and a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the data exchanged between the payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of power activation, and the display production | presentation control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of card insertion, and the display production | presentation control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of money_receiving | payment, and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of an addition request | requirement, and the display production | presentation control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of a subtraction request | requirement, and the display production | presentation control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part and the display effect control board in a game. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of card | curd return, and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part and the production | presentation control board for indicators when the unsent data to a card unit exists. It is a figure which shows an example of the process between the payout control part at the time of operation mode switching, and the production | presentation control board for indicators. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a display. (A) is a flowchart showing security related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server side, and (B) shows security related information setting processing as processing executed on the CU side (main control unit). It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of information processing related to P-unit security. It is a flowchart which shows P unit security related information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed by CU. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed with P units. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S machine and CU. It is a front view which shows the card unit and the pachinko machine in another example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side in a modification. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S stand and CU in a modification. It is a flowchart figure which shows the modification of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, an enclosed circulating pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine” or “P”) 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. A pachinko machine that accepts membership cards, which are recorded game recording media, and uses the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the cards. 2 has a function for allowing the ball to be fired and playing. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  This pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when a player operates a hitting ball operating handle 25, a hitting ball launching motor (also called a launching motor) 18 is driven to enclose the ball. Is configured to be able to play a game by driving it into the game area 27 on the front surface of the game board 26 one by one.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, which is not shown, but has a start port (1) and a start where a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win a prize. And a variable display device that variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start ports, and the display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a big prize opening) or the like that is opened by a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance) is provided. The start port (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port (1), the big winning port (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port (2), the big winning port (2) is the first state. Furthermore, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning holes (1) to (4).

  Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 win at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening (not shown) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth (not shown) are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of stored balls specified by the member ID are used for the surface facing the player when the member card is received. A replay button 319 for executing the replay game, and an IR light receiving unit 320 for receiving an infrared signal from a remote control (not shown) possessed by a staff of the game hall, converting it to an electronic signal and outputting it. Yes.

  Furthermore, a lending button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it in the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information described later. In addition to being capable of being displayed, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, it is possible to play with a pachinko machine by deducting from the number of possessed balls. If the card is a membership card, the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the game can be played by the pachinko machine 2 as it is withdrawn from the stored ball.

  The “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, “the number of possession balls” is the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of a player playing a game with a gaming machine on a card, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of retained balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. Has been. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801 in association with the card number.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 to the player. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 6 and a glass door that can be opened and closed with its left edge as a swing center with respect to a frame-shaped outer frame.

  A front frame closing detector 13 (see FIG. 5) for detecting that the front frame 6 is pressed against the outer frame and is in a locked state is provided at a position where the front frame 6 contacts the outer frame. . Further, a glass door closing detector 12 (see FIG. 5) for detecting that the glass door is pressed against the front frame 6 to be in a locked state is provided at a contact portion of the front frame 6 with the glass door. ing.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 6, and when the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited, the lock is released and the front frame 6 is opened. Further, a glass door opening solenoid 10 (see FIG. 5) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 6. When the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited, the unlocked state is established and the glass door is opened.

  2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. On the other hand, all winning balls won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball apparatus, etc. are detected by a winning ball detection switch (not shown) and collected by a winning ball collecting cover member 144 and collected. Guided to the ball passing path 901. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flow path 702. The out ball flow path 702 is provided with an out ball detection switch 701, and a ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls flow down the foul ball return path 151 and flow down from the foul ball return port 150 through the foul ball return path 902 and the recovery ball passage path 901. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151, a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down is provided.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 enters the recovery ball passage path 901, flows down together with the winning ball and the foul ball, and enters the ball collection path 189. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the foul ball merge are detected.

  Further, a 50 replenishment detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at an intermediate position on the downstream side of the shot ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether or not the number of pachinko balls built in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 collects and detects all the pachinko balls that have been shot into the game area 27, and the number of shot balls that have been shot into the game area 27 and the number of shot balls that have been shot. When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The fired ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used for detecting that the number of encapsulated balls built in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the last 50th pachinko balls of the enclosed balls that are stopped in a non-operating state in which no game is being performed are displayed. The position is configured to be located between the 50 replenishment detection switch 904 and the firing ball detection switch 903. As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are encapsulated in the gaming machine 2, the pachinko balls that are parked in a state where no game is played will exceed the detection position of the firing ball detection switch 903. The fired ball detection switch 903 is always in a ball detection state, thereby making it possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of encapsulated balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls that are parked in the non-game state are located downstream of the detection position of the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, and the replenishment 50 The individual detection switch 904 enters a non-detection state where no ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too smaller than the predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko balls that have flowed down the ball collection path 189 enter a transport device 190 for transporting the pachinko balls upward. The conveyance device 190 includes a conveyance screw 190b that is rotated by the conveyance motor 40, and the pachinko ball is conveyed upward by the rotation of the conveyance screw 190b. The conveying device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 that polish the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of conveyance, and the surface of the pachinko balls is polished while being conveyed upward. The The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish the pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball entrance of the transport device 190, and a pachinko ball entering the transport device 190 is detected. On the other hand, a pachinko ball conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by a ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying pachinko balls one by one to the ball launch position. When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting motor 18 is driven and the hitting hammer 920 is intermittently swung. One pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is ejected by the hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 196a and a ball feed member 196b that swings up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 196a in order to supply pachinko balls one by one to the ball firing position by the hitting hammer 920. Yes. The ball feeding member 196b has a U-shape as shown in FIG. 2, and receives one pachinko ball that has flowed down, and in this state, the rectifier solenoid 196a is excited to feed the ball by its driving force. The member 196b swings downward. Then, the received pachinko ball is supplied to the ball hitting position. When the hitting hammer 920 bounces the supplied pachinko ball, the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The hitting hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the hitting direction, and the hitting hammer 920 is reverse to the hitting direction (backswing direction) by the action of a cam that is rotated by the driving force of the hitting motor 18. Is swung. Then, when the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the cam action is released and the hitting hammer 920 is rocked in the driving direction by the biasing force of the spring, so that the pachinko ball is bullet-launched. The spring urging in the hitting direction can be adjusted by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting momentum can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The ball removal unit 915 is provided with a ball removal motor 195a. When a game attendant operates a ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay board 921, the ball removal motor 195a rotates by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be extracted out of the path.

  The ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is used for the on / off control of the conveyance motor 40 by the detection signal. In a state where the hitting operation by the hitting operation handle 25 is not performed and the hitting ball is not shot, the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation, so that the pachinko balls conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 flow down at the rectifier 916. Is stopped and stopped. When the pachinko ball to be stopped reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball detection signal is constantly output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. When the continuous output state of such a ball detection signal continues for a predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds), the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped and the transport of the ball upward is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to fire the hitting ball, the rectifier 916 executes a ball feeding operation. As a result, the ball that has stopped and stopped at the rectifier 916 is stopped. The ball detection signal is not output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the ball is lifted. Since the number of balls raised per unit time by driving the conveyance motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls firing per unit time by driving the firing motor 18, the driving of the conveyance motor 40 is started. When a little time has passed, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again outputs a ball detection signal, and the driving of the carry motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hitting of the hit ball continues, the ball detection signal is not output again from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the ball is lifted. In the operating state in which the player is performing the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor 37 (see FIG. 5). The firing motor origin sensor 37 is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 stops when the player releases his hand from the touch link 35 provided on the hitting operation handle 25. When the firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin of the firing motor 18 when the player releases his hand, the firing motor 18 is fired. The motor 18 is controlled to stop. In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, if the launch motor 18 is deviated from the origin position and the output of the launch motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the launch motor 18 is rotated forward depending on the current position of the launch motor 18. Alternatively, control is performed to reverse the position and move the stop position of the firing motor 18 to the origin without firing the pachinko ball. The current stop position of the firing motor 18 is compared with the position of the origin to determine whether the firing motor 18 is rotated in the normal rotation direction or the reverse rotation direction in the rotation direction close to the origin position. You may make it move a stop position to an origin by carrying out rotation control to.

  Similarly, a ball removal motor origin sensor 195b (see FIG. 5) is provided in the ball removal motor 195a, and the ball removal motor 195a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The above-described winning ball detection switch, gaming ball shortage detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, and out ball detection switch 701 are electrostatic capacitances due to the passage of balls. It consists of proximity switches that detect changes in On the other hand, only the shot ball detection switch 903 is configured by a photosensor of a light projecting / receiving type. In amusement halls, there are cases where fraudulent acts using radio waves are performed in which fraudulent radio waves are transmitted to misdetect the ball detection switch. When such an improper radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may be erroneously detected, but the photosensor has no risk of erroneous detection.

  As a result, when a fraudulent act of transmitting an improper radio wave occurs, the winning ball detection switch, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by proximity switches, output detection signals associated with erroneous detection. However, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the fired ball detection switch 903 formed of a photosensor, the total number of detected balls and the fired ball of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the winning ball detection switch. A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection switch 903. As a result, fraudulent acts caused by radio waves can be monitored. The above-described winning ball detection switch, game ball shortage detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, out ball detection switch 701, and shot ball detection switch 903 are provided. , All may be composed of the same type of switch.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part 380 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 380 and 20 are comprised by the connector etc., for example. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 380 and 20 and connection wiring. When the CPU of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, the CPU transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and displays an error on the display 312. And a control to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The above-described money discriminator 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the main control unit 323 to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 39, and an effect section 50. Is provided.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via the connector 380 and the connector 20. Electrically connected. The P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by a one-chip LSI 799. Then, as will be described later, various commands such as an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P unit communication control unit 81. Various commands are transmitted from the P-unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit communication control unit 81, various kinds of game balls, addition balls, subtraction balls, start opening winning information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, error information A response is sent.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  Further, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33, a glass door opening solenoid 10, a front frame opening solenoid 11, a glass door closing detector 12, and a front frame closing detector 13 are electrically connected to the payout control unit 17. It is provided in a connected state.

  The main control board 16 transmits a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, and manufacturer-specific jackpot information to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout controller 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control unit 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start opening prize information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize at either the start opening 1 or the start opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control. Specific examples of the error include, for example, a magnetic sensor error that brings a magnet close to the game area 27 to guide the game ball to the winning opening, a radio wave sensor error that illegally turns on the winning ball detection switch by transmitting an illegal radio wave, a variable prize There is an illegal winning error in which a detection signal is output from a 10 count switch that detects a winning ball of a variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed. When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects such an error or non-connection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain plate and the I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from a not-shown (not shown).

  The symbol fixed number of times is information on the symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device with respect to winning at the start port 1 or the start port 2. The information of the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning at the start port 1 is called the symbol determination frequency 1. The symbol information determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning at the start port 2 is referred to as symbol determination frequency 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the out-ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27). The payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of game balls, and updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction, as will be described later.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 performs excitation control of the glass door opening solenoid 10, the glass door is unlocked and can be opened. When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 11, the front frame 6 is unlocked and can be opened.

  By pressing the glass door against the front frame 6 and closing it, a glass door closing detection signal is output from the glass door closing detector 12 and input to the dispensing control unit 17. By pressing the front frame 6 against the outer frame and closing it, a front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P unit control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the addition is performed from the CU communication control unit 80 to the payout control unit 17 via the P unit control unit 81. Various commands such as a request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted.

  As will be described later, the addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a game ball is rented or replayed from the prepaid balance, and the payout control unit 17 adds the number of game balls in response thereto. Update. As will be described later, the subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a split ball transfer (ball sharing process) or a wagon service is performed, and the payout control unit 17 receiving the command receives the number of game balls. Update the subtraction.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the game ball number by the above-described addition request command. The subtraction request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be subtracted from the game ball number by the above-described subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit control unit 81, various responses such as the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, jackpot information, and error information are received. Sent. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. This is the total number of game balls currently played. The number of balls to be added is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is. The number of subtracted balls is the number of subtracted balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on a firing detection signal transmitted from a game ball control unit 34 to be described later to the payout control unit 17. Each response of the start opening prize information, the number of symbol determinations, the jackpot information, and the error information is a response that designates the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting the signal (touch ring input signal). The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the firing motor 18. The single shot switch 36 is used for a player to perform an operation (single shot operation) for driving a pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one. When the single shot operation is performed, the single shot switch 36 is used. A single fire switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs a detection signal thereof. Each time the firing motor 18 makes one revolution, the origin is detected and a signal is output.

  A touch ring signal and a single shot switch detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that a pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor 37 are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. Receiving the firing detection signal, the payout control unit 17 updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of in-game balls by 1 and updates the number of game balls by 1 for the detection of the number of fired balls.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  The ball removal unit 39 is provided with a ball removal motor 195a, a ball removal motor origin sensor 195b, and a ball removal switch 922 described with reference to FIGS. A game attendant operates the ball removal switch 922 to input a detection signal to the payout control unit 17. Further, the origin detection signal of the ball removal motor origin sensor 195 b is input to the dispensing control unit 17. On the other hand, a ball removal motor drive control signal is output from the payout control unit 17 to the ball removal motor 195a.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the transport unit 45 provided in the game ball control unit 34 includes a transport motor 40, a game ball shortage detection switch 904, a ball lift switch (lower) 41 b, and a ball lift. A switch (upper) 41a and a fired ball detection switch 903 are provided. A conveyance motor excitation output signal for exciting the conveyance motor 40 is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 17 to the conveyance unit 45. On the other hand, 50 replenishment detection signals as detection signals of the game ball shortage detection switch 904 are input from the transport unit 45 to the payout control unit 17, and detection by the ball raising switch (lower) 41b and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a A conveyance detection (pass / full) signal is input as a signal. Further, a detection signal of a shot ball (joint ball) is input as a detection signal of the shot ball detection switch 903. Based on this detection signal, the payout controller 17 subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of balls floating in the game area 27).

  The counting unit 46 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with a foul ball detection switch 33 and an out ball detection switch 701 in addition to the above-described ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the fired ball detection switch 903. ing. A detection signal of the foul ball detection switch 33 is input to the payout control unit 17. Based on this foul ball detection signal, the payout control unit 17 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of game balls, and subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls).

  A polishing motor excitation signal is output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the above-described polishing motor 193a provided in the polishing unit 47.

  The effect section 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power supply relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. Is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Control is performed to read image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the ROM board 55 for the display device, to transmit the display data to the display device 54, and to display the display screen on the display device 54. To do. The button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display 54.

  Electric power of a predetermined voltage from the display power supply board 51 is supplied to the display effect control board 53 via the display power supply relay board 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. The display unit control commands include a gaming machine information notification command for notifying gaming machine information, a card insertion notification command for notifying card unit insertion and return, a card return notification command, and the like.

  Here, the gaming machine information is, for example, information including the current ball related information described in FIG. 6. Specifically, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls, and the winnings at the start ports 1 and 2 Such as numbers. More specifically, it is various information shown in FIGS. 82 and 83.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 53 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 54 to display the lighting of the calling lamp and the error animation.

  The variable display device is not shown in FIG. An effect control board (not shown) for controlling display of the variable display device is connected to the main control board 16, and the effect control board uses the variable display device based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16. Control display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, main ones of various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and transmission / reception modes thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the current number of game balls is managed by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P side on the CU side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is controlled so that when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the P table side, the P game player quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a secondary item used only for performing Since the main management of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P table side, and the cost of the P game can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared with the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function related to the number of game balls on the P platform side to reduce the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 6 shows RAM storage data provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control unit 17 on the P platform side. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine product code are transmitted from the main control board 16 (see FIG. 12), and the main chip ID, the chip maker code, the gaming machine maker code, and the gaming machine are transmitted. The product code is transmitted to the CU side, and the dispensing chip ID stored in the dispensing control unit 17 (see FIG. 12) itself is transmitted to the CU side. In FIG. 6, the chip manufacturer code, the gaming machine manufacturer code, and the gaming machine product code are not shown. The main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine product code are stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control board 16. The payout chip ID is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the payout control unit 17. The main chip ID is a unique code for identifying whether the main control board 16 is legitimate. The chip manufacturer code is a code for identifying the manufacturer that manufactured the chip mounted on the main control board 16. The gaming machine manufacturer code is a code for identifying the manufacturer that manufactured the P stand 2. The gaming machine product code is a product identification code attached to the P stand 2.

  On the CU side, the main chip ID, chip manufacturer code, gaming machine manufacturer code, gaming machine product code, and payout chip ID transmitted are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code, payout chip ID, and connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. Become. When the power is turned on after that, the respective information from the P platform side to the CU side, that is, main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code, payout chip ID, and previous connection time data are stored. Sent.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by "1" and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and the P platform in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in response to the operation instruction. When the SQN is received from the P unit, the CU rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and the next time the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated on the P platform.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 to 66, which will be described later, when communication disconnection occurs during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. Regardless of this, since the operation response is always transmitted (see FIGS. 50 to 66), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the SQN transmitted last. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received in accordance with the occurrence time of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 50 to 66), backup storage is performed until communication is reconnected. The SQN being sent is either the last sent or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the P platform side. Then, when the operation response is returned from the P platform side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the P platform side.

  Next, the current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 wins and the additional ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the additional ball counter is used to calculate the additional ball number. Counting is performed, and the value of the added ball counter (the number of added balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. If a pachinko ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, a subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and the subtraction. The value of the number of balls counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, the pachinko ball has won the start opening (1) or the start opening (2), and the start opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the winning numbers on the P platform side using the starting port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P platform side to the CU side. Further, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time with the game ball number counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtraction balls, and the count value of the game ball number counter is changed from the P side to the CU side. Send to.

  On the P side, every time the value of the addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter, starting port 2 winning counter, and game ball counter is transmitted to the CU side, After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the previous ball related information storage area, the values of the additional ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter and starting port 2 winning counter as current ball related information are set to 0. clear. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings at the start opening 1 And the data of the number of start-up 2 winnings is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side, this backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), the starting port (1) the total number of winning prizes (starting port (1) The total number of times), the start opening (2) the total number of winnings (start opening (2) total number of times), and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total number of added balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (number of added balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Also, the total number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the starting port (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on the starting opening (2), the total number of winnings is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P cars. Similarly, the CU updates the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the starting port (1), (2) the total number of winnings by updating the current ball related information transmitted from the P unit one by one. Information can be managed.

  The breakdown of the “number of added balls” is game ball acquired number information and back ball added information. The back ball is a foul ball. The “subtracted ball count” is also referred to as game ball shot count information.

  The CU receives the count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball count or game ball total count information) in addition to the value of the addition ball counter and the subtraction ball counter from the P side. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball counter sent from the P platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P side does not match the number of game balls managed on the CU side, the number of game balls on the CU side is sent from the P side. It is never updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side with the current number of game balls updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing, transmits a communication start request command to the P units, and uses the data correction request Bit1 data included in the command to determine the number of P game balls ( Processing to correct the game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed. As the correction process, correction is made to the number of game balls managed on the CU side. Instead, the number of game balls managed on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side are stored. You may correct | amend to the average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801 (in this case) An error notification may be performed by the hall management computer 1 or the upper server 801), or a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by an attendant may be performed.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the P platform side, and calculates and manages the current number of game balls based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter in particular. Has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the P platform. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P side for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, a game ball counter for storing the number of game balls on the P platform side may not be provided.

  The CU performs a game ball number matching determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated number of game balls at the present time with the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P platform side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a holding ball (a stored ball) and a storage area for storing a card balance of a received (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 12) of the CU receives the ball in response to an input requesting the use of the ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 provided on the CU). A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area to be stored. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own game value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the amount of the deducted ball The addition request ball number for adding the number to the game ball counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P stand side. On the P side, in response to this, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation for performing a so-called wagon service order in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like is executed, the number of balls requested to be subtracted from the player-owned game value is To the P platform side. On the P platform side, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the P platform side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a history of a game state generated when a player plays a game with the P table 2. For example, the start history (variable) is a variable display count of a variable display device. Display device variation start count), number of occurrences of jackpot, number of starts from previous jackpot to current jackpot, base value, and the like. This game history data includes game history data throughout the day on the P machines and game history data aggregated for each player on the P machines. As will be described in detail later, the former game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit provided on both the P machine side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P machine side and the CU side. Are stored in the current player game history data storage unit provided in both of them or in the backup storage unit provided only on the P platform side. In other words, the game history data throughout the day on the P machine and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P machine are stored in both the CU 3 and the P machine 2.

  Referring to FIG. 7, various game data such as big hits and start (variable display device start of fluctuation) are generated by the player playing the game with P table 2, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. Is done. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing the game on the P units is totaled, for example, by the sales mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17, and the totaled game history The data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 53, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The present P game history data storage unit can store game history data for 10 days including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to select and display the game history data on the day to be displayed, the game history data on the selected day is displayed on the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is a one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the above-described game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323, for example, via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU3. The game data is aggregated by the sales mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The totaled game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. This P stand game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to store only the game history data of the day. If the player touches the display 312 configured with a touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured so that the game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game hall can be displayed on the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches an operation button icon of the other P device information display displayed on the display 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P device information is displayed. The other P machine game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1 by the operation of the processing unit. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P machines 2 via the other CU 3, and returns the received other P machine game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other P game history data by the other P information processing unit, and processes the processed other P game history data in the data storage unit 392. Store in the history data storage unit. The stored other P game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to aggregate game history data for each player who played a game on the P platform 2 and display the game history data for each player on the display units 54 and 312. In order to tabulate the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the P unit 2. C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card possessed by a player who is a member is used as player identification information for distinguishing the player. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in a card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to a player who becomes a member in the game hall, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also a member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player. In addition, the C-ID of the visitor card also indicates the player in the game from the time when the player inserts cash to start the game until the game ends (until the return button 322 is operated, etc.). It becomes information to identify.

  When a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card and the card type are read and the C-ID and type stored in the data storage unit 392 are read. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID and type are transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 by a card insertion request command, and the P unit 2 converts the received C-ID and type from the game history data management unit 291 to the display unit. The data is transmitted to the effect control unit 292 and stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292. Further, the P base 2 returns a response of the card insertion response to the CU in response to the card insertion request command. The “type” is not shown in FIG.

  In this state, when the player plays the game with the P stand 2, the game history data from when the C-ID and the type are stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292. Cumulatively stored in the player game history data storage unit. If the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to display his / her own game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display. 54.

  In addition, the game history data management unit 391 also adds the game history data to the sales mode processing unit based on the game data transmitted from the P table 2, and stores the C in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. -The game history data aggregated by the sales mode processing unit from the stage where A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. When the player touches the display 312 including a touch panel and performs an operation for displaying his / her game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls the display 312 to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day on the P platform and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P platform are displayed on both the P platform side and the CU side by the display switching operation. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When a player playing a game on the P table 2 presses the return button 322 to return the member card inserted, a card return request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response of a card return response to the CU in response to the card return request command. Thereafter, the membership card is discharged from CU3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID, type, and game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the card return request transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, so that the current player game The C-ID, type, and game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when the game by the P table 2 is ended, but the player temporarily stops the game, ends the small game, and returns to the P table 2 where the game has been played again to play the game. May resume. In such a case, usually after performing a game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the card is brought to the player, the player completes a small use, and the player returns to the same P stand 2 to return the card to the CU3. Although it is inserted, the player may press the return button 322 and remove the card from the P stand 2 without performing such a game interruption operation.

  In such a case, when the same player who has left the P table 2 without playing another player returns to the P table 2 and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he leaves. It is desirable to take over the previous game history data of the player and add and update the game history data after the game has been resumed to the game history data for cumulative storage. In order to realize this, the C-ID, the type, and the game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. When the player who has returned to the P table 2 inserts the member card into the CU 3, the card information of the member card is read, and the inserted card information including the C-ID and type of the member card is transferred from the CU 3 to the P unit. 2 is transmitted.

  In the P table 2, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID and type included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID and type to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID and type with the C-ID and type stored in the backup data storage unit, and determines whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who has left the seat has resumed the game, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are stored in the current game. It returns to the player game history data storage unit and stores it in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. Game history data generated after the player played a game with the P unit 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the C-ID and type included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the comparison result of the C-ID and type stored in the backup data storage unit do not match. In this case, A as C-ID and a as game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are deleted.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  The display result control unit 292 displays the comparison result between the C-ID and type stored in the backup data storage unit, the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3 and the type, and whether or not they match. The data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of the CU 3 via the dexterous effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, in the case of a determination result indicating that the transmitted C-ID and the determination result of the type match, the C-ID determined to match is used as the current game in the data storage unit 392. Stored in the player game history data storage unit. In the case of a determination result that the C-ID and the type determination result match, the game history data a is included in the C-ID and type determination result.

  The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, if the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the sales mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated. In this state, if the player performs an operation of touching the display 312 to display his / her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the instrument 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to erase the backup data stored when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between a sales mode for providing a game to a player and a non-business mode for enabling trial hits, maintenance, etc. by an attendant at the game hall. As the non-business mode, three modes of a maintenance mode, a test mode, and a trial hit mode are prepared.

  When a game attendant specifies a mode by remote control operation, the information is received by the CU, and the mode is switched. For example, if any of the non-business modes is designated, the game history data management unit 391 transmits a mode change request to the P machines. Upon receiving this, the P game history data management units 291 change the mode and return a mode change response to the CU. In response, the non-business mode processing unit of the CU game history data management unit functions. The non-business mode notification is transmitted to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the non-business mode processing unit on the P platform.

  In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores the game history data based on the game data generated thereafter in the non-business mode game history data storage unit. This non-business mode game history data storage unit is configured with a storage area different from the above-mentioned P-unit game history data storage unit, current player game history data storage unit, and backup data storage unit. The game history data in the non-business mode is stored in the mode game history data storage unit. However, the memory in the non-business mode game history data storage unit is erased when the mode is changed next time. Then, the game history data stored in the non-business mode game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  Note that the memory of the non-business mode game history data storage unit may be retained even if the mode is changed. In this case, a plurality of non-business mode game history data storage units are provided for each type of non-business mode. Further, in this case, the non-business mode game history according to the operation by the staff (operation of the chance button 56 and the jog dial 57 while viewing the display unit 54, operation of the touch panel of the display unit 312 or remote control operation). Data stored in the data storage unit may be read for each non-business mode and displayed on the display unit 54 or the display unit 312 on the CU side.

  Also in CU3, the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P-unit 2 is totaled by the operation of the non-business mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the totaled game history data is non-business. It is displayed on the display 312 as game history data in the mode.

  In the display 312, operation button icons such as a re-aggregation button are also displayed. After the nail master who has viewed the game history data in the non-business mode displayed in the aggregate mode adjusts the nail based on the game history data, the non-business mode is displayed again. There is a case where it is desired to check the result of the nail adjustment by summing up the game history data and displaying it. In such a case, the recount button icon is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and a recounting notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P 2. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display effect control unit 292.

  In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 once erases the game history data stored in the game history data storage unit in the non-business mode, and then re-uses the game data based on the game data generated thereafter. Control to be stored in the game history data storage unit in the mode is performed. Then, the game data in the non-business mode game history data storage unit that has been added up again is displayed on the display 54. On the other hand, on the CU3 side as well, the non-business mode processing unit executes the game history based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game data management unit 391. The display unit 312 displays the non-business mode game history data that has been aggregated and recalculated.

  Thereafter, when the mode is switched by remote control operation, the display effect control unit 292 erases the game history data stored in the non-business mode game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more game balls in the non-business mode, the game balls are added by sending a game ball addition command from the CU side to the P units, thereby enabling the game. Note that when there are no more game balls in the non-business mode, the game machine may automatically add game balls without sending a game ball addition command from the CU side to the P units, thereby enabling a game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding game balls on the gaming machine side, it may be controlled so that the game can continue even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of a slot machine 2S, which will be described later, when there are no more points in the non-business mode, a point addition command is sent from the CU side to the S units to allow the game to be added.

  The P table 2 is provided with a RAM clear switch 293. The RAM clear switch 293 is used to clear the stored data of the RAM by outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above when operated. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is stored. At the same time, the oldest stored data of 10 days of stored data in the P game history data storage unit is deleted, and the remaining 9 days of stored data are shifted one by one to the old day storage area. Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area.

  Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In response to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day (game history data before shifting to the old day) in the P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292, game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391 so that the data is backed up and stored in the hall management computer 1.

  Also, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification is the current P unit in the data storage unit 392. Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  Note that while the card is held in the CU3, even if a RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data is not cleared.

  Next, the non-business mode will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the maintenance mode. The maintenance mode is a mode for setting various parameters for operating the gaming machine.

  Switching to the maintenance mode is performed by selecting “Maintenance” with the remote control of the card unit.

  By switching to the maintenance mode, for example, the display setting for the number of hit balls and the threshold setting for the base abnormality can be performed as parameter settings.

  In the display setting of the number of hits per hit, there are provided the number of hits per hit (TY) for the past 10 times and the total number of hits per hit until the so-called continuous change in the P units. In the maintenance mode, the display mode can be set.

  Regarding the threshold setting for the base abnormality, in the present embodiment, only the upper limit value of the threshold is set, and the lower limit is not defined. Therefore, the base abnormality is determined based on the upper limit value of the set threshold. The threshold value is, for example, 70 when the base is low (when the variable time shortening function is not activated) and 150 when the base is high (when the variable time shortening function is activated). In the present embodiment, it is possible to display the base measurement results for the current day and the past 10 days on the display of P units or CUs.

  Note that various setting operations in the maintenance mode are input by, for example, the touch panel of the display unit 312 on the CU side, and the input information is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Alternatively, various settings in the maintenance mode may be performed by operating a remote controller used for mode switching. Instead of or in addition to these setting operation methods, a touch panel may be provided on the display device 54 on the P platform side, and the touch panel touch operation may be performed. In this case, since the one-way communication from the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 is adopted, the touch operation signal of the display 54 cannot be input to the payout control unit 17. It is necessary to control the display 54 on the CU side, not on the display effect control board 53. Specifically, a touch operation signal on the touch panel of the display unit 54 is input to, for example, the display control unit 797 of the CU 3 and transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P platform 2 via the main control unit 323.

  In addition, in the maintenance mode, a test game in which all the functions of the gaming machine are operated is possible. That is, as in the sales mode, the ball is fired, the variable display device is variably started according to the start winning, and the variable winning ball device is opened and closed according to the occurrence of the big hit. However, even in that case, the number of balls such as the number of shots is not managed during the maintenance mode. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 6, the P platform sequentially transmits current ball related information data such as the number of game balls to the CU in the sales mode, but in the maintenance mode, such control is performed. Do not do. For this reason, data such as the number of game balls is not managed on the CU side.

  Even during the maintenance mode, the P platform stores game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations indicating the game status when a game is played by a staff member of the game hall, etc., but the maintenance mode is switched to another mode. At the stage of switching, the memory is cleared. However, when the mode is changed, variables affecting the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function are not saved, so that the gaming state immediately before the mode switching is maintained even after the mode switching. As a result, for example, when the maintenance mode is ended in the probability changing state and the mode is switched to the sales mode, the gaming state of the P machines is in the probability changing state.

  Transition to the maintenance mode is not possible from any state, but transition conditions that can be shifted are defined. As shown in FIG. 8, the transition condition is that the number of game balls is 0 and the card balance is 0 yen (including a case where no card is inserted), that the symbol is not changing in the variable display device, To meet all the conditions of not being a big hit.

  As a result, for example, even if the player is playing a game, the mode is switched by accidental operation of the remote control or the input of the same signal as the remote control signal for mode switching, resulting in damage to the player. Can be prevented as much as possible.

  An end condition of the maintenance mode is that all the game balls that have been fired are discharged from the board. This condition is satisfied when, for example, the P platform calculates “number of fired balls− (number of foul balls + number of merged balls)” and the result becomes zero. To end the maintenance mode, select “Sales” with the remote control of the card unit. As a result, the maintenance mode ends and the business mode is switched.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the test mode. The test mode is a mode for confirming the operation of each mechanism of the gaming machine. The test mode is switched by turning on the power of both the pseudo card unit and the P unit after connecting a test dedicated card unit called “pseudo card unit” to the P unit. The pseudo card unit has, for example, the same function as the card unit used at the time of business, and further has a function of transmitting a mode change request command for instructing the P units to switch to the test mode when the power is turned on.

  In this way, since switching to the test mode is conditional on the connection of a pseudo card unit that is not used during business, the normal card unit used during business is connected to P units, and the player can play the game. It is possible to prevent accidental switching to the test mode in the provided state.

  In the test mode, a launch test for confirming the operation of the game ball launch mechanism alone, lending a ball with a pseudo card unit, operating the handle to operate the game ball circulation mechanism, various displays 54 Partial tests such as a display test that displays a test screen are possible. Details of the firing test and the circulation test are shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the test mode, an overall test in which a gaming machine is operated (test game) can be performed in the same manner as when a game is provided in a hall.

  In the overall test, as in the sales mode, the ball is fired, the variable display device is variably started according to the start winning, and the variable winning ball device is opened and closed according to the occurrence of the big hit. However, even in that case, the number of balls such as the number of shots is not managed in the test mode. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 6, the P platform sequentially transmits current ball related information data such as the number of game balls to the CU in the sales mode, but in the test mode, such control is performed. Do not do. For this reason, management of data such as the number of game balls is not performed on the side of the pseudo card unit connected to the P units.

  Even during the test mode, the P platform stores game history data such as the number of jackpots and the number of symbol rotations indicating the game situation when a game is played by a staff member of the game hall, etc., but the test mode is switched to another mode. At the stage of switching, the memory is cleared. However, when the mode is changed, variables affecting the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function are not saved, so that the gaming state immediately before the mode switching is maintained even after the mode switching. As a result, for example, when the test mode is ended in the probability change state and the business mode is switched, the P game state is in the probability change state.

  The conditions for shifting to the test mode and the termination conditions are the same as those in the maintenance mode shown in FIG. To end the test mode, select “End Test” on the remote control of the card unit. Thereafter, the power of the pseudo card unit and the P units is turned off.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the trial hit mode. The test hit mode is a mode for performing operation confirmation when installing a gaming machine in the hall, displaying the number of balls such as safe / out, and confirming a base when adjusting the gauge.

  Switching to the trial mode is performed by selecting “trial” with the remote control of the card unit. The conditions for transition to the trial mode and the end conditions are the same as in the maintenance mode.

  By switching to the test hit mode, it is possible to make a test hit with all the functions of the P units. However, even in that case, the number of shots such as the number of shots is not managed during the test hit mode. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 6, the P platform sequentially transmits current ball related information data such as the number of game balls to the CU in the sales mode, but in the test hit mode, such control is performed. Do not do. For this reason, data such as the number of game balls is not managed on the CU side.

  Even during the trial hit mode, the P platform stores game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations indicating the game situation when a game is played by an attendant at the game hall, etc. At the stage of switching, the memory is cleared. However, when the mode is changed, variables affecting the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function are not saved, so that the gaming state immediately before the mode switching is maintained even after the mode switching. As a result, for example, when the trial hit mode is ended in the probability changing state and the sales mode is switched to, the gaming state of P units is in the probability changing state.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, when a floating ball exists in each mode, until the result of the floating ball is confirmed (all the game balls that have been released are discharged from the board surface). The mode cannot be changed (the termination condition is not met). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the mode is switched in a state where the game result in a certain mode is uncertain, and the switched previous mode (for example, the sales mode) is affected by the previous floating ball.

  In addition, instead of performing the mode transition after waiting for the confirmation of the floating ball, if there is a floating ball when there is a mode transition operation, the processing waiting time of the floating ball is timed, and a predetermined period of time has passed It is also conceivable to switch the mode on the condition. However, by deliberately not adopting such processing, there is an effect that fairness among the players can be ensured by giving the players the change of the ball that is not caused by the player's operation.

  Note that whether or not there is a floating ball is determined by the payout control unit 17 by referring to the value of the in-game ball counter shown in FIG.

  Further, since the transition condition is established on the condition that the number of game balls = 0, there is an inconvenience that the business mode is erroneously switched to the non-business mode when there are game balls and the player is playing a game. Can be prevented. Further, during the non-business mode in which it is not necessary to manage the number of game balls on the CU side, the P units do not transmit information such as the number of game balls to the CU. Therefore, the management burden such as the number of game balls of the CU in the non-business mode can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when changing the mode, variables that affect the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function are not saved. However, instead of this, these variables may be saved when the mode is changed, and when the mode is switched back, the gaming state in the previous mode may be returned.

  Modified example: The gaming state may be temporarily saved when switching from the operation mode, and may be restored when switched back.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the conditions for shifting to each mode. First, as described in the explanatory diagram, when a normal power supply is turned on (at the time of cold start), it starts up in a business mode. Thereafter, the business mode is shifted to each of the modes 2 to 3 in accordance with each operation of the trial hit mode shift operation, the maintenance mode shift operation, and the test mode shift operation. Mode 1 means the sales mode, mode 2 means the test hit mode, mode 3 means the maintenance mode, and mode 4 means the test mode.

  Furthermore, in accordance with a transition operation for switching back to the sales mode, the mode is shifted from the trial mode, the maintenance mode, and the test mode to the sales mode. Even when the power is cut off or the communication between the CU and the P stand (line cut) occurs, the mode setting at that time is maintained for each. For this reason, at the time of the temperature start after the power-off is recovered, it starts in each maintained mode.

  In addition, an operation of shifting from any one of the three modes 2 to 4 of the test hit mode, the maintenance mode, and the test mode to the modes 2 to 4 is invalid. That is, the mode that can be switched from the test hit mode, the maintenance mode, and the test mode is limited to the sales mode.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 12, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, this is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here is that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 12 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. This mutual authentication includes device authentication (see FIG. 15) using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit (not shown) to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the P unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P-unit communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the fact is detected by the CU communication control unit 80, and the main control unit 323 is notified that the abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 notifies the abnormality notification described above. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the fact that the payout control unit 17 has detected an abnormality is detected and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 16. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout controller 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality has occurred in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 799 detects and notifies the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, this LSI 799 also does not perform control for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSI 799 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and do not have a function of performing abnormality notification control on their own even if an abnormality is detected. .

  In the control of FIG. 12 described above, the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Although not shown, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  Data with a transmission direction of CU to P units is a command, and data with a transmission direction of P units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to the P units.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by the P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication start request is a request for clearing recovery information and backing up the connection ID (communication start time) to the P units.

  A communication start response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This operation instruction instructs a game operation to the P units and requests transmission of game table information such as game balls.

  An operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies game table information such as game balls.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This communication disconnection request is a request for disconnecting the communication connection to the P units.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that a communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication test request notifies communication data to the P units.

  A communication test response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  An outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. Although not shown, the transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is a command from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying IC serial ID authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  The second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Device authentication requests 1 and 2 and device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described with reference to FIG. 29 described later.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described with reference to FIG. The data included in the writer management information response includes a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but transmits an authentication key update request.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (P unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying an authentication result with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one. The CU communication control unit 80 obtains information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799 and then returns an authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command requesting re-authentication with the P-unit communication control unit (P-unit communication control unit re-authentication request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying the response of the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit re-executes authentication between the P unit communication control units, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the P unit communication control unit re-authentication response. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  BB serial ID authentication requests A and B, BB serial ID authentication responses A and B, device authentication requests A and B, and device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request A) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written in from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication stored in the EEPROM (not shown)). Key) is a response for transmitting from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. Padding character (random number), MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the ECB block encryption mode.

  An authentication key setting response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. Information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB block cipher mode is used for encryption and transmission using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, among the commands / responses, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response will be described in detail.

  A recovery response is transmitted from the P units to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held by the P units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup storage so that when the CU sends a recovery request command to the P units as the recovery process is executed, the P units send a recovery response to the CU. That is. The recovery information transmitted from the P platform to the CU includes the connection time, the last sequence number, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information.

  The column “encrypted” is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted, and the symbol “◯” indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication) backed up by the P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number that was backed up by P units. The C-ID is a C-ID that has been backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the previously notified game ball acquisition number information, the previously notified back ball addition information, the previously notified game ball firing number information, the previously notified symbol determination count 1, the previously notified symbol determination count 2, the previous notification The number of times of the starting port, the number of times of the starting port notified twice last time, the number of times of the first prize winning port notified last time, the number of times of the second time winning big winning port, and the number of times of winning ports 1 to 4 notified last time. As described above, the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are divided by bits, but may be divided and transmitted by bytes.

  “Game ball acquired number information” is information on the number of balls to be added to a game ball by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information for adding a foul ball detected by a foul ball detection switch (not shown) to a game ball. The “game ball firing number information” is information on the number of pachinko balls fired by a launching unit (not shown). “Out ball passage information” is information indicating that an out ball has been detected by passing through an out ball detection switch (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, “game ball acquisition number information” and “back ball addition information” are collectively referred to as “addition ball number”. Further, “game ball firing number information” is expressed as “subtraction ball number”.

  The “symbol determined number of times 1” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is the number of times the symbol has been determined by the variable display device 2.

  “Starting port number 1” is the number of pachinko ball winnings to the starting port 1. “Starting port number 2” refers to the number of times a pachinko ball is awarded to the starting port 2.

  “The number of times of the grand prize opening 1” is the number of times the grand prize opening 1 is opened (number of rounds). “The number of times of winning the prize winning opening 2” is the number of times of opening the winning opening 2 (number of rounds).

  “The number of winning holes 1 to 4” is the number of times that a pachinko ball is awarded to each of the winning holes 1 to 4.

  Further, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P platform to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. Specifically, the current ball related information is information on the total number of game balls currently held by P units (also referred to as the number of game balls), information on the number of acquired game balls currently held by P units, and currently P units. Back ball addition information that is held, information on the number of game balls that are currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, current 1 start opening held by P stand, 2 start openings currently held by P stand, 1 big winning opening currently held by P stand, 1 prize opening currently held by P stand 2 times, the number of winning openings 1 to 4 currently held on the P platform.

  The information other than the previous ball related information is data to be backed up by P units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  The meaning of the various balls and the contents of the confirmation points will be described in detail later, but will be briefly described below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. Note that the CU checks whether the number of game balls of the P units matches the number of game balls after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the P units. The communication is disconnected and P games are stopped (see FIG. 43 and the like). Then, the CU executes a recovery process, and transmits a communication start request to the P machines (see FIG. 23), so that the game ball correction request is transferred to the P machines in accordance with the data correction request included in the communication start request command. The P game balls are corrected to the number of game balls after being corrected on the CU side.

  The symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are symbol determination information for the winning of the pachinko ball to the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, respectively. The CU is used to count the number of times the game table (P units) starts. Is used.

  The number of start ports 1 and the number of start ports 2 are the number of times that the pachinko balls have won the P start ports 1 and 2 and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  The number of times of winning 1 and winning 2 is the number (number) of pachinko balls that have been won in P's 1 and 2 and the CU is operating a game machine (P). Use this data for status checks.

  The number of winning openings 1 to 4 is the number of times that the pachinko ball has been awarded to the P normal winning openings 1 to 4, and the CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game machine. To do.

  The communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P machine requests the P machine to correct the game balls and the sequence number and to back up the new communication ID (communication start time).

  Specific data of this communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data. The connection time is the time when communication between the CU and the P unit is started, and is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the P units, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request for clearing the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls”, etc. to the P units is made.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a game ball correction request. When it is “0”, it indicates that there is a game ball correction request, and when it is “1”, it indicates that there is no game ball correction request.

  It should be noted that when the bit designating the presence / absence of a request is “0”, the request is not indicated, and when the bit is “1”, the request is indicated. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. In addition, as shown in parentheses in the data correction request column, “clear request” is “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” is “game ball correction”. ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The game balls are the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  At the time of transmitting this communication start request command, the CU backs up the connection time and information such as “main chip ID” and “payout chip ID”.

  The P units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request. When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held by the P units.

  When the game ball correction request is ON, the notified game balls are overwritten with the game balls held by the P units.

  Back up the connection time. In addition, each process performed with the said P units is performed in an order from the top.

  The operation instruction command transmitted from the CU to the P unit is “game ball addition”, “game ball subtraction”, “game permission / prohibition”, and “game ball and sequence number clear” operations for the P unit. And requesting transmission of various game machine information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. With respect to Bit 0, a game ball number addition request is instructed when “1”, and a game ball number addition non-request is instructed when “0”. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a game ball number subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no game ball subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the presence of a clear request for the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed, and when the bit is "0", the request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door opening request for opening a glass door (not shown) that covers the front of the game area 27 so that it can be opened and closed, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) opening request. Bit 7 is provided as a spare.

  The “game ball number addition request” is also simply referred to as “addition”, the “game ball number subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, the “game prohibition request” is also simply referred to as “prohibition request”, and the “game ball number request” "Sequence number clear request" is also simply referred to as "clear request", and "glass door open request" is also simply referred to as "glass open request".

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are “1”, the P units execute in order from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit base of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is being performed when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1”. In some cases, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and non-business mode is in operation when Bit 5 is “1”.

  This CU state is composed of 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but it may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = Cash insertion processing Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit3: 1 = Member card holding Bit7-4: Reserve Bit8: 1 = Prepaid lending display Bit9 : 1 = Replay lending display Bit10: 1 = Mochitama split display (Mochitama shared display)
Bit 11: 1 = Wagon service is displayed Bit 12: 1 = Clear is displayed Bit 13: 1 = Resume It is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This data on the number of balls requested for addition indicates a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  Data of the number of balls required for subtraction that is valid only when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This subtraction request ball number data indicates a value to be subtracted from the game ball number.

  Further, card balance data indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units.

  It should be noted that during the holding of the card, the data may be such that the card inserted into the CU can be distinguished depending on whether the card is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, “holding card” is composed of 2 bits, and the first bit is set to “1” while the membership card is held, and the second bit is set to “1” while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, the card is basically kept in the CU at all times, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. It may be controlled so that the C-ID is transmitted as (when Bit is 1). Further, the C-ID may not be stored in the visitor card, but the C-ID may be stored only in the member card.

  Further, the error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Note that “ALL00h” is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  The response of the operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the game table information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, it is transmitted from P units to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6. For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the addition of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. Regarding Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the number of game balls and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the execution result that game ball number and sequence number clear are not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the cell release has been rejected is indicated, and when “6”, an execution result indicating that the cell release is not rejected is indicated.

  Note that “game ball number addition refusal” is simply called “addition refusal”, “game ball number subtraction refusal” is simply called “subtraction refusal”, “game permission refusal” is also simply called “permission refusal”, and “game “Prohibition refusal” is also simply referred to as “prohibition refusal”, “game ball number and sequence number clear refusal” is also simply referred to as “clear refusal”, and “glass door open refusal” is also simply referred to as “glass open refusal”.

  The “game ball total number information” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls obtained as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “game ball acquisition number information” is the number of acquired game balls, and is the total number information when there are a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball acquisition number information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card.

  “Back ball addition information” is the number of back balls (foul balls) when fired by a launching unit (not shown). is there. The CU 3 adds the data of the back ball addition information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding the card. The “game ball firing number information” is the number of balls fired by a launching unit (not shown), and is information of the total number when there are a plurality of balls fired at the time of transmission. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the game ball firing number information from the number of game balls currently held, but does not subtract the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card. CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by CU3 is zero. The “out ball passing information” is the number of out balls detected by the out ball detection switch, and is the total number when there are a plurality of out balls at the time of transmission. The “symbol determination number of times 1” is symbol determination information for winning of the start port 1, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 2, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball acquisition number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball firing number information”. Specifically, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back ball addition information−game ball firing number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of game balls (total number of game balls). Then, it is checked whether or not the total number of game balls transmitted from the P units matches the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information). If they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A communication start request command is transmitted to the P units, and the data correction request data (Bit2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of game balls stored in the CU are stored in the P units. Processing for correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed.

  Bits 0 to 3 are prepared as gaming machine error status 2, but this is provided as a reserve, and is used to deal with manufacturer-specific error information that is not used to specify the actual error status. Is.

The contents of each bit in the gaming machine state 1 will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.
The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game table state 1 indicates whether or not the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P device that has received an instruction by the command from the CU is instructed. Transition to the state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the P cars transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball), and the state where the fan (player) is not firing a ball is waiting The state in which a fan (player) is firing a ball is playing. The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the launch of the ball is stopped in the P platform, and then all the pachinko balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are collected and the whereabouts of all the launched balls is confirmed It is. The state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are unconfirmed is the game incomplete (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are confirmed is the completion of the game (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if the P platform has not confirmed the ball firing for 15 seconds or more, it times out and the game is completed.

  If the completion of the game has not been confirmed for 15 seconds or more and the game has been completed, and the ball clogging that has occurred in the game area has been resolved and the ball has won, etc. A display prompting reinsertion may be displayed on the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so that other cards are not accepted until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, the number of game balls is manually corrected (manual correction) by a game clerk or the like.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P machines), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the P machines are activated. The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not the P table has game table history information such as “start count” and “big hit count”, and when it is “0”, there is no game table history information. In the case of “1”, the presence of game table history information is indicated. If the game machine history information is cleared by clearing RAM, the P machine turns this data OFF. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at a timing when data such as “start count” and “big hit count” is added. In order to match the game machine history data with the P machine, the CU 3 also clears the game machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

The contents of each bit of the game table state 2 will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.
The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” during the big hit and during the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” during the big hit, during the small hit and during the high base. For the big hit 3 of Bit 2, “1” is set during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to “1” during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base) and during the high base. The high base of Bit4 is set to “1” during the high base.

  The game table error state 1 is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, and the contents of each bit will be described later in detail, but will be briefly described below.

  Bit 0 is a bit indicating whether or not the frame body (front frame), that is, the cell is being opened, and is set to “1” when the cell is being opened. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, that is, the glass door is being opened, and is set to “1” when the glass plate (glass door) is being opened. Bit2 is set to “1” when a magnetic sensor error is detected when the magnetic sensor detects an illegal occurrence of bringing a magnet close to a game area or the like. After “1” is set, Bit 2 is set to “0” by turning on / off power of the P units.

  Bit3 is set to “1” when an illegal winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, the power is restored by turning on / off the power of P units, and Bit4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  A response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication state is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x10, it is indicated that it is abnormal. CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which occurrence of disconnection between the P platform and the CU is detected.

  The response of the device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID (also referred to as a main chip ID), a chip manufacturer code, a gaming machine manufacturer code, a game Machine product code, format code, payout control chip ID, manufacturer code, format code, and MAC.

  A device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit of the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information such as the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the main control unit of the CU. The command code identifies the command code. The data size of the command is specified by the code size. One of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified by the acquisition result. The main control chip ID is the chip ID recorded on the P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is the P payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU main control unit 323 and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating processing of a connection sequence at the time of power activation. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 13 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after turning off the power of the CU in a standby state where no card is inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power-on, communication is started after stopping the hitting motor 18 to stop the game in the P platform. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. The specific control contents of the authentication sequence process are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence processing, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response, the P device returns a response of a device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the P devices that have responded (P devices identified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to P units.

The P devices that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 14A and 14B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. There are two types of authentication sequences shown in FIG. 13, that is, an authentication sequence when the power source of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power source of the P units (game machines) is activated. An authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 14A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. Thereafter, communication is started. A mutual authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then a chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 14B shows an authentication sequence when the power source of the P machines (game machines) is activated. Referring to FIG. 14B, after the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 detect the communication disconnection with the P units, the CU communication control unit 80 recovers the communication with the P units, Authentication with the stand. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Thereafter, communication with P units is possible.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the mutual authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. By this BB serial ID authentication sequence, the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown) is authenticated. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This writer management information is information relating to the ROM writer used when writing authentication information to an EEPROM (not shown). For example, data such as ROM writer ID, ROM writer manufacturer code, and key version stored in the ROM writer.

  Whether the main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, so that they match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check by the writer management information, a certain level of security is ensured and the security is improved even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a counter information notification command for requesting transmission of counter information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, it becomes the same ciphertext. There is an inconvenience that it can be determined by comparing the ciphertext whether or not it is the same as the portion, and in order to solve this, the initial vector of the CTR mode is notified to the CU 323. The encryption mode is set by notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day at the game hall, so that security is improved. The ciphertext of communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data is exchanged every day even if the encryption is performed, and the encryption is easily broken. Such inconvenience can be solved by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 obtains update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) and the received time information, and performs main control as a time response. To the unit 323. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 19 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a payout control authentication result request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result with the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests a main chip ID, a chip manufacturer code, a gaming machine manufacturer code, a gaming machine product code, and a payout chip ID. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the main chip ID, the chip manufacturer code, the gaming machine manufacturer code, the gaming machine product code, and the payout chip ID to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 to collate the device information (chip ID and the like), and when it is NG (inappropriate), stops the subsequent communication. If it is not NG, a business message can be transmitted to the P machines thereafter. Then, transmission / reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and an operation response command response is performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The host server 801 registers the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine product code of each P unit 2 shipped from the amusement hall, and the main chip ID and chip maker transmitted from CU3. Check whether the code, gaming machine manufacturer code, gaming machine product code, and payout chip ID are already registered, and if not registered, return NG (inappropriate) judgment result to CU3. If it is registered, an appropriate determination result is returned to CU3. In the case of an NG (inappropriate) determination result, there is a possibility that the main control board 16 or the payout control unit 17 has been tampered with, and the upper server 801 issues a warning notification that an abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 15, and authentication in a challenge response system is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and performs the CU communication using the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request. Transmit to the control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2. Transmit to the main control unit 323. In response to this, the main control unit 323 checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate. When it is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be used. An example of the algorithm is described below. As a challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) having the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as a response code generation in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of a BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side matches the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number. The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as a response code. If they match, the main control unit 323 determines that the random number is appropriate, while if not, the main control unit 323 determines that the generated random number is incorrect (NG). judge.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM, and the challenge code A is transmitted to the CU communication control unit serial number. The ID authentication response 1 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and the response code A is transmitted to the CU communication. The control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 checks the response code A to determine whether it is appropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the challenge code B request is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 performs control so that subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is inappropriate (NG).

  The algorithm of challenge code generation and response code generation shown in FIG. 18 may be any algorithm. For example, the algorithm using exclusive OR described in FIG. 17 can be used. .

The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. In terms of the equation, the challenge code A = E _SIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. In terms of an expression, response code A = D _SIDM (challenge code A) = D _SIDM (E _SIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. In terms of the equation, challenge code B = E _SIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. _{Expressed by the} equation, response code B = D _SIDT (challenge code B) = D _SIDT (E _SIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and an ECB mode is used as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits a device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Also create a MAC. This MAC is the Message Authentication Code. For example, a value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is defined as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates the original plaintext random number A by decrypting the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and the random number A is generated as the predetermined random number A. The MAC is calculated using a hash function. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and MAC are further transmitted as an apparatus authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80 as an authentication result based on the apparatus authentication response 1. In response to this, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to obtain the original plaintext random number B. Then, the MAC is calculated by calculating the random number B using a predetermined hash function. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the received MAC. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as a device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. When the determination result is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 transmits the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the higher-level server 801 includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to a new authentication key transmitted from the higher-level server 801, and sends an authentication key update request transmitted from the higher-level server 801. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 performs processing to update the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to the new authentication key that has been transmitted, and performs the main control using the result as an authentication key update response. To the unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. If the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM (not shown). The authentication key is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the EEPROM (not shown) of the main control unit 323 is shown. ) Stores the authentication key.

  Referring to FIG. 21, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence at the time of card unit (CU) manufacture. First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on condition that an authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the SID authentication request A of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to the main control unit 323. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving the request, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. Transmit to the control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. It transmits to the communication control part 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is appropriate, and transmits the authentication key information shown below only when it is appropriate (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 21 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key information stored in the EEPROM (not shown). Is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in an EEPROM (not shown), and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating the storage to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 then performs device authentication using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. If it is determined that the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a reset wait state is entered.

  Next, returning to FIG. 13, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the P units. In response to this, the P machine returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine (specifically, the payout control unit 17) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), previous ball related information, and current ball related information. In the following flowcharts, “recovery data” refers to the various data described above. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by the P devices as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the P platform, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The P platform stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the P unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the P unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU has retransmitted the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code, payout chip ID, and connection time to the values received from the P units and sets SQN to “0”. And a command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, game ball = 0 is transmitted to the P units as a command of a communication start request (recovery clear ON). In response to this, the “P” matches the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P table with the information of the CU (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). Also, the notified “connection time” is backed up. And the P platform returns a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request and SQN = 0 is transmitted to P machines. In response to this, the data of SQN = 1, the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 are backed up. To do. Further, the P platform clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2), which are current ball related information, to zero. Then, as for P platform, SQN = 1, number of game balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, And a game prohibition (game stop state) response is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 on the basis of the operation response, calculates the current number of game balls by calculating the current number of game balls 0 + the received number of added balls 0−the received number of subtraction balls 0. In addition to backing up 0, the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of start ports (1) = 0, and the total number of start ports (2) = 0 are backed up.

  Next, at the stage when the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request and an operation instruction of SQN = n to the P machines, and the P machine that receives it sends a game permission refusal OFF as an operation response. , SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, and response of game permission to CU To do.

  When a proper authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 15, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 22 is executed. FIG. 22A shows a case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 22B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 22A, after the above-described authentication sequence is completed and communication is possible using the session key, the main control unit 323 instructs the CU communication control unit 80 to operate. Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirming the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request) is transmitted. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) of the operation instruction message as a communication state response (not shown).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 22B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The difference from FIG. 22A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 confirms the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the response of the transmitted communication status response is numerical data other than 0x00. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of retry executions is one in FIG. 22B, but may be executed two or more times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the P stand are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P platform has ended abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power supply is activated while holding the card in FIG. 36, or when the P unit in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, a. The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting, b. The connection sequence after the communication is disconnected by sending a communication disconnection request. (See FIG. 43), or c. The SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P unit are inconsistent, and it is determined as one of a to c. When it is determined that the normal communication has not ended (abnormal end), the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 23 instead of FIG. 13 is executed.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 13, and the differences will be mainly described here.

  First, the time when P devices prohibit the game and start communication is immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 13 is when the power is turned on, a recovery clear ON communication start request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit clears the recovery data in response to the command. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 according to SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all the previous ball related information and current ball related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 23, since it is at the time of reconnection, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the P units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, in the CU, after starting the recovery process, the game balls and the like are corrected in accordance with the contents of the recovery data (the previous ball related information, the current ball related information, etc.) on the P platform included in the recovery response. Execute the process. Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, and game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from the P unit, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back Ball addition information—Calculates the number of game balls fired and performs processing to correct the stored number of game balls to the calculated new number of game balls. Recovery data from the corrected number of game balls and P units Is compared with the game ball total number information transmitted as, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they do not match, a command with game ball correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the P units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P unit is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the P units. Also, the correct number of game balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P units.

  The P machine receives the communication start request command, and performs a correction process to match the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P machine with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and game balls = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  The CU backs up the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, gaming machine product code, and payout chip ID transmitted from the P units at the stage of completion of the recovery process, and the time at the time of reconnection Back up the connection time that is. And about the sequence number, when the last SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the communication partner P units do not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the P unit The number of the current game balls included in is converted to a one-handed ball. The “mochidama” refers to the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. Then, after the possession ball is recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the possession ball of the recording medium, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball, and then replay is possible. At that time, similarly to the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 13, recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P units receive the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P units in the first operation instruction, and the PQ backs up the SQN = 1. In addition, in the P-unit, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the number of additional balls, subtracted balls The counter values of the number, the number of start ports (1) and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  With reference to FIG. 24, processing of the CU and the P unit when a card is inserted will be described. In the card unit 3, when a card is inserted, information such as a card balance and a card ID recorded on the inserted card is read by a card reader / writer. Then, a process for inquiring of a higher order server for card information such as a card balance and C-ID is performed. In addition, as an operation instruction, a command of card insertion processing ON indicating that the card insertion processing is in progress and an addition display (card insertion) OFF command are transmitted to the P units.

  Eventually, when the card information inquiry process is completed, the CU puts the display unit 312 on the CU side into a display state during addition display. Thereby, when the number of game balls is specified for the inserted card, the display of the number of game balls is displayed in addition from 0 to the specified number of game balls. Further, the CU stores the C-ID and type (and the balance) obtained by the inquiry process in the payout control unit 17 and transmits them to the P units in a card insertion request command. In the P platform, the payout control unit 17 holds and stores the received C-ID and type, and transmits the information as a “card insertion notification” to the display effect control board 53 (see FIG. 89). Further, the P platform returns a response of the card insertion response to the CU, and notifies the CU that the C-ID and type data have been received.

  Subsequently, the CU backs up the number of game balls and SQN specified by the inserted card, and, as an operation instruction, turns off the card insertion process and turns on the addition display (card insertion), And the number of addition requests = 5000 is transmitted to the P units. The P units update and store the number of game balls based on the operation instruction, and transmit the number of game balls and card balance to the display effect control board 53 as game ball number related information of “game machine information notification” (FIG. 89). reference).

  Thereafter, when the addition display is completed on the CU side, the CU transmits data indicating that the card insertion process is OFF, the addition display (card insertion) is OFF, and the addition request count = 0 to the P units as an operation instruction. The end is notified to P units.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion executed by the card unit when a card is inserted into the card unit. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 25, CU performs each step of S1-S7. In addition, S8 to S10 and S12 to S15 are executed by P units. More specifically, the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15 is executed by the display effect control board 53 provided on the P platform, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is performed by the display effect control unit. The display effect control board 53 provided with 292 transmits to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 transmits to the CU.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not this is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupting operation shown in FIG. 32 to be described later has been performed and a game interrupting sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the suspended card. If not, the process proceeds to S5. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 25, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, a process of storing the C-ID and type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P cards is performed in S3. The P-unit receives the C-ID and type, and compares the received C-ID and type with the C-ID and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 7) ( S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (S8, S9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Display control means (display effect control board 53 provided with display effect control unit 292), the same determination processing function is not provided on the communication means side (payout control unit 17 side). As a matter of fact, a common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the display control means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data, C-ID and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12 to return the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) to the current area (player game history data storage unit shown in FIG. 7), and the game history data. The game history data is newly added and updated.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted in S13. Further, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, processing when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) is consumed will be described. In the processing of FIG. 26, the prepaid balance is “1000” and the current game ball is “50”. First, a command with no addition, OFF during addition display, SQN = n, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 0 is transmitted as operation instructions from the CU. In response to this, in the P units, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the number of start ports (2) = Responses of 0, game possible, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF are returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls to be added) = 175 and balance = 500 are backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Next, the CU is in the addition display. During this addition display, the display 312 displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands with addition being present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request ball number = 0. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P platform backs up SQN = n + 2, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0, After creating the response, clear each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) to 0, the number of additional balls required for the current number of game balls 50 The number of game balls is updated to a value of 175 including 125.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2) Responses of the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF are returned.

  In response to this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175 (number of game balls before update) +0 (number of balls required for addition) −0 (number of balls required for subtraction) = 175, and the number of additional balls The cumulative total = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 0, the starting port (1) total = 0, and the starting port (2) total = 0 are backed up.

  Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  In addition, in the P machine, when an operation instruction command including the number of balls with and without addition is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing between the consumption of the ball (replay of the stored ball) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. The subsequent processing is executed in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the process at the time of replay which consumes a stored ball is demonstrated. In FIG. 27, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 27 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG. On the CU side, when a replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a storage ball specified by the card, SQN = n + 2 , The number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls required for addition) = 125 and the number of stored balls = 875 are backed up. Storage ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125 since 125 (the number of addition request balls) was withdrawn from the original storage ball = 1000. This is because the balance in the case of FIG. 26 is data in monetary units, while the holding balls in FIG. 27 are data in units of balls, so that it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including “Yes”, “ON” during addition display, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, storage ball = 875, subtraction request ball number = 0 as operation instructions to P units. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  The other processes are the same as those in FIG. As described above, the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and the number of balls stored (the number of game balls is also The same) is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, processing for subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service or the like) according to an instruction from the CU will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which a game ball owned by the player is consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 to place a wagon order, whereby the order contents ordered by the player are transmitted from the IR light receiving unit 320 of the card unit 3 to the infrared ray receiving unit 320. As a signal, it is input to a remote control owned by a game shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 28 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used game balls is generated in a state where there are “1000” game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of game balls used when the wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction. Then, a command with subtraction, ON during subtraction display, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 0 and subtraction request ball number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P platform. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display an indication that the subtraction is being performed (displaying) (not shown).

  The P machines that have received the command determine whether or not the value of the game ball counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 28, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is equal to or greater than the number of subtraction requests. In the P-unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, display control including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball (during subtraction display).

  Next, the P platform backs up and adds SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0 and the number of front start ports (2) = 0. The counter values of the number of balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the game ball number is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction ball number 300 from the current game ball number 1000.

  Then, from the P platform to the CU, the subtraction rejection is OFF, SQN = n + 3, the number of current game balls = 700, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port (2) A response indicating that the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF is returned.

  Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 1000 (number of game balls before update) −300 (number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (number of balls to be added) −0 (number of subtraction balls) = 700, and game balls The number is corrected to “700” and backed up. Thus, the subtraction of the number of game balls is determined only after waiting for the response of the motion response from the P units.

  Further, the CU backs up the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and the starting port (2) cumulative = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P units determine that the value of the game ball counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number, the P units do not perform subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . In this case, the P platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the game balls have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the P cars refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 28, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction from the CU is determined only after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 27, the accumulated (contained) consumption based on the instruction from the CU is determined when the CU accepts the retained consumption.

  In this way, the reason for determining the different timings for the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” and the “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of game balls, such as a wagon order, the subtraction instruction is sent because there is a margin in the number of game balls, but the game balls are used in the game when the P units receive the subtraction instruction. As a result, there are cases where the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is confirmed based on the number of game balls stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of game balls actually does not remain on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units.

  On the other hand, for “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction from the CU”, it is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so the P units are stored when the instruction reaches the P units. Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, “save (contained ball) consumption based on CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts the storage (contained) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, processing when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 29, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and a probability variation big hit occurs while the operation instruction and the response of the operation are being transmitted and received between the P units and the CU in the game. After the completion of the control, the probability change in which the jackpot occurrence probability is improved is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n is backed up, and a command with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P-unit backs up SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-added balls = 3, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13, the number of front start ports (1) = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 1. The number of game balls = 1010 + 3 (the number of added balls) −13 (the number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 1000, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtracting balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability change is OFF is transmitted to the CU. In this way, the P units transmit not only the number of subtraction balls and the number of addition balls, but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of game balls stored in the P unit matches the number of game balls managed by the CU.

  In addition, in the P platform in the present embodiment, as described above, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, and therefore, one pachinko ball is shot into the game area in 0.6 seconds. Will be included. Since the command / response is transmitted at intervals of 200 ms, the number of balls to be subtracted between the previous response transmission and the current response transmission is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P platform to the CU is either 0 or 1. However, when the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of game balls does not change so much, and the processing flow becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as necessary are exaggerated for convenience.

  In the CU that has received the response of the operation response, the number of game balls = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000 is calculated and the 1000 is backed up as the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the start port (1) Accumulation = 1 and Start port (2) Accumulation = 1 are backed up.

  While repeatedly performing the transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and an operation response response, a probable big hit occurs in the P units, and the ball related information includes the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtraction balls is changed to 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Then, the probability change starts after the big hit at the P platform. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P platform, SQN = n + 3 is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 120, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 20, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, and the number of front start ports (2) = 2 are backed up. At the same time, the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1100. Further, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, the number of subtraction balls = 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of start ports (2) = 2, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is ON, and the special prize is ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100, corrects the number of game balls in that 1100, and backs up, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 120, the total number of subtracted balls = 20, start-up port (1) accumulation = 2, and start-up port (2) accumulation = 2. Further, the CU detects that the “special prize” has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, processing when it is detected that there is no game ball while playing with P cars will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 20, and first, the CU backs up SQN = n and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P units as operation instructions. In the P-unit, SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-added balls = 3, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 18, the number of front start ports (1) = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 1 are backed up. Then, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 5, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtracting balls = 18, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability change is OFF is transmitted to the CU. The CU calculates SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5, and then corrects and backs up the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 18, Back up 1) Cumulative = 0 and Start Port (2) Cumulative = 0. After that, since the number of subtracted balls is 5 in P units, the number of game balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The starting port (2) number of times fluctuates to zero. At the stage where the number of game balls becomes 0, no balls are detected in the P units, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 so that the ball cannot be hit into the game area. Control to prohibited state. It should be noted that if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued only by stopping the hitting of the hit ball. If there is a start memory at the start port (1) count or the start port (2) count at the stage where the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3 is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 5, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 are backed up, After creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracting balls = 5, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the number of start ports (2) = 0, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability change is OFF is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of game balls to 0, and backs up, and also adds the total number of balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 5, the start port (1) Cumulative = 1, and start port (2) Cumulative = 0.

  In this way, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) is performed when the number of game balls reaches 0 in the P platform, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, the final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform ball hitting stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the P platform side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the motion response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the P platform side becomes 0 is received. Wait, when the final number of game balls is calculated on the CU side and becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the P base side, and received When hitting ball stop control is first performed on the P platform side, there is a possibility that a pachinko ball will be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new number of subtraction balls may be generated during that time. On the other hand, although the number of game balls has already become “0”, a new subtraction ball number is generated and eventually the game ball number becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the ball hitting stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the P platform side.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hitting ball stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P player itself, this control is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, the game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Although the example in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting ball firing stop control is shown here, the main control board 16 may be configured to perform the hitting ball shot stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main control board 16 when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits the driving of the ball striking motor 18.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a process when a card return operation is performed will be described. In the state where the number of game balls is initially set to 500, an operation instruction from the CU to the P unit, and in response to an operation response from the P unit to the CU, when the return button 322 is pressed, the CU As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition request to prohibit the game, no clear request, clear display OFF, and SQN = n + 2 command is transmitted to the P units.

  Receiving this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 according to the prohibition requested instruction included in the command, and controls to the hitting shot stop state (game prohibition state). In addition, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, and game completion OFF as an operation response. The CU receives this, and specifies that the P player is in a game prohibited state and that the game has not been completed (waiting for floating ball processing).

  After that, the P platform is provided with a 15 second weight in consideration of the time until all the balls that have been fired flow down the game area 27 and flow to the out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. Polling is continued between the P units and the CU during the wait time of 15 seconds. During this time, the CU repeats transmission of an operation instruction that is ON during card return processing. Eventually, when the floating ball becomes 0 before 15 seconds elapse, the P platform returns an operation response including game completion ON to the CU.

  In addition, the P platform has a game ball counter for storing the number of floating balls. If this value becomes 0 within 15 seconds, an operation response including game completion ON is sent to the CU at that time. Send back. For this reason, for example, when there is no floating ball at the time when the return button is operated (the number of balls in game counter = 0), the P machines respond to the operation instruction command with a prohibition request, The response of prohibition and game completion ON is returned. In this case, substantially no wait time is set.

  On the other hand, if the floating ball does not become 0 before the wait time of 15 seconds elapses, a game completion ON response is returned at that time. In this case, the value of the game ball counter is forcibly initialized to 0.

  The CU that has received the game completion ON operation response determines that the game result has been confirmed. Then, an operation instruction including clear request, clear display ON, and card return processing ON is transmitted to P units, and SQN and clear request data are backed up, and the display is being cleared. To.

  The P machines receive this operation instruction, shift the game history data, the C-ID and the type currently stored in the backup area and store them, and clear the storage of the number of game balls. In addition, an operation response including clear rejection OFF, SQN = 0, and the number of game balls = 0 is transmitted to the CU. The CU receives this, and backs up SQN = 0, game ball = 0, and the determined holding ball = 500 at that time.

  Subsequently, the CU transmits a card return request to the P units. In response to this, the P platform returns a card return response including the C-ID and type data received at the time of card insertion and stored in the payout control unit 17 as a backup. Upon receiving this, the CU performs a match determination between the stored C-ID and type and the C-ID and type included in the card return response. Record the holding ball = 500 on the card that is in the card and eject the card. On the other hand, if they do not match, error processing is performed. For example, the following error processing is performed.

a Do not eject the card or record the number of game balls on the card.
b Generate an alarm sound, display an error on the display 312, and notify the host server 801 or the like of an error.

  c The card is ejected, but the upper server 801 and the like are notified that the number of game balls on the card in an abnormal state is recorded.

  Any one of the processes a to c or a combination of two or more processes is executed as an error process.

  After the error process, the CU transmits an operation instruction indicating that the clear display is OFF and the card return process is OFF to the P units. The P machines wait for this and clear the C-ID and type data backed up by the payout control unit 17.

  In this example, the CU receives the input of the “signal for requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of game balls at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 31, the holding ball = 500 is recorded and ejected on the inserted card, but the card number of the card is not directly recorded on the card but the card number of the card is recorded on the upper server. The points may be stored in association with each other. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  Further, in FIG. 31, a waiting time of 15 seconds is always provided for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side, and the P platform does not return a game completion ON response to the CU until that time has elapsed. It may be.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 24 and 31, the C-ID and type are notified from the CU to the P unit only by the card insertion request command at the time of card insertion, and the card return response at the time of card return The CU is notified to the CU only by the response. In this way, since the C-ID and type are transmitted only at the start and end of the game, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of sending and receiving commands and responses in vain. Here, “at the start of the game” specifically means that when a game is played using a member card, the member card is inserted into the CU 3 and a card insertion request command is transmitted to the P unit 2. When a game is played using a visitor card, the player inserts money into the CU3 at the start of the game, loads the value into the visitor card, and sends a card insertion request command to the P unit 2. It is time when. “At the end of the game” is the time when a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 according to the operation of the return button 321 for both the member card and the visitor card.

  In addition, the C-ID and type are notified from the CU to the P unit only by a card insertion request command at the time of card insertion, and from the P unit to the CU only by a card return response response at the time of card return. Alternatively, the C-ID and type may be included in the operation instruction and response after the card is inserted.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the game is interrupted. This process is similar to the process of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card in FIG. 31, and the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so that the player can finish the use, and the player calls a store clerk at the game hall and asks the store clerk to perform a remote control operation to interrupt the game. Then, the IR light receiving unit 320 receives the infrared signal output from the remote controller, converts it into an electronic signal, and inputs it to the main control unit 323. In the case of this game interruption process, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the P machines. As a result, the P machines store and hold data (C-ID, number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player. Then, when the CU discharges the card, the card with 0 points is discharged and returned to the player. Thereafter, during the interruption, the game of other players is prohibited (see FIG. 25).

  With reference to FIG. 33, the process when the glass door is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as a first operation instruction, a command including an instruction not to open a glass door and requesting no glass opening is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Receiving it, the P vehicle returns a normal response including the number of game balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, if a trouble occurs such as a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 on the P platform, the player calls the attendant at the game hall. An infrared signal for unlocking and opening the glass door by operating the remote controller is transmitted to the IR light receiving unit 320. Receiving it, the IR light receiving unit 320 inputs a glass door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands for prohibiting the game to stop, no glass opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the P platform. That is, before the glass door is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P platform in order to perform the ball hitting stop control at the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. Next, the P platform returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to the CU.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the operation instruction command including the above-described prohibition request is transmitted to the P units, the time until all balls fired in the game area 27 in the P units flow out and are collected, that is, floating In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a wait of 10 seconds is provided, and during this time, the CU continues to poll by transmitting a command including an instruction indicating that the game is prohibited, that is, the prohibition request is present to the P units.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a command including an instruction of opening the glass to unlock and open the glass door and an instruction of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P platform as an operation instruction.

  In response to this, in the P platform, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is energized to unlock the glass door to open the glass door, turn on the bit during the development of the glass door, and then the glass door closes. It remains ON (until a detection signal is input from the glass door closing detector 12). Then, the P platform returns a response including a response such as glass open refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development in progress as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the glass opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a response of glass opening rejection ON is not returned, it is determined that the glass door is opened. Thereafter, a command including no glass opening request is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 34 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference from the processing of FIG. 33 is that when an instruction input for opening the glass door is detected in the CU, not only there is a prohibition request for instructing a prohibition request for a game, but the glass door is unlocked and opened. A command with a glass opening request indicating the request is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving this command, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. At the same time, all the balls shot in the game area 27 flow into the out balls and are collected. Considering the floating ball processing waiting time, a 10 second wait is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P platform continue to transmit / receive operation instructions / operation responses. When the wait time of 10 seconds elapses, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited to unlock the glass door and open the glass door. Then, the bit during the development of the glass door is turned ON, and thereafter, the bit is kept ON until the glass door is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted).

  And as for P platform, glass opening refusal OFF which does not refuse opening of a glass door as an operation response, a game prohibition which shows that it is in the state where ball hitting is stopped, and that the lock of the glass door is released and it is being opened A response including data such as that during glass development is shown to the CU.

  The CU determines that the glass door has been opened by receiving an operation response indicating that the glass opening rejection is OFF.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 34 is characterized in that the 10-second wait process considering the floating ball process waiting time is performed not on the CU side but on the P platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a process for unlocking and releasing the cell (front frame) 6 will be described. The opening process of the cell (front frame) 6 is the same as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When an attendant at the game hall operates the remote controller to unlock and release the front frame (cell) 6, infrared light including a cell release command signal is output from the remote controller to the IR light receiving unit 320. Is done. In response to this, the IR light receiving unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, it is determined in the CU that a cell opening instruction input for opening the cell has been detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data such as prohibition request existence and cell opening request absence data for prohibiting the game to the P units. In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state.

  In the CU, a 10-second wait is set in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10-second wait time ends, the cell open request data that is an instruction to unlock and release the cell is sent. The command including it is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform releases the front frame 6 by exciting the front frame opening solenoid 11 (see FIG. 5) to unlock the front frame 6. Then, the bit in the cell development is turned on, and thereafter, the bit is kept on until the detection signal from the front frame closing detector 13 (see FIG. 5) is input until the cell is closed.

  And as for the P platform, as an operation response, cell opening rejection OFF that does not reject the cell opening request, game prohibition indicating that it is in a ball hitting stop state, cell development underway indicating that the cell is being opened, etc. A response including data is transmitted to the CU.

  If the CU is not rejected with respect to the cell opening request, that is, if a response including cell opening rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell has been opened.

  Also in the process for releasing the cell shown in FIG. 35, the P platform side has a function of providing a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time as in the modification shown in FIG. When the command input for cell opening is detected, the CU sends a command including instructions for prohibition request and cell opening request to the P units, and the P unit side receives the command and performs the hit ball firing prohibition control. After that, the operation instruction / response is continued between the 10-second wait period CU and the P platform, and when the 10-second wait time has elapsed, the front frame opening solenoid is excited to lock the front frame 6. It may be canceled and released, and thereafter a cell open rejection OFF, a response including data during cell development, may be transmitted to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of the P platform, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of processing when the power supply is activated while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality occurs in which the P units are not connected. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the P unit while the card was inserted and the P unit was playing, the recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of P units has occurred, a response from P units is not returned to the CU. Then, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the P units. Nevertheless, if no response is returned from the P units, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the P units. If no response is returned from the P units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. And a control to turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp. A device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when a store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR light receiving unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. In response to this, the CU adds the “number of game balls” backed up by the CU to the “held ball” of the inserted card and clears the “number of game balls” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. The command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer. Upon receiving this, the card reader / writer discharges the taken card. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  After that, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P devices and performs a connection sequence (see FIG. 23) restart process. The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state where a card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. To do. The number of balls to be added (for example, j) or subtraction balls between the occurrence of P connection failure and the restart of the connection sequence (see FIG. 23) until the first operation response is transmitted by P units. Processing when a number (for example, r) has occurred is performed in the restart processing of FIG. Referring to FIG. 23, the CU receives the recovery response from the P units, thereby calculating the number of game balls = 0 + j (the number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of game balls as the calculation result = J + r is backed up. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 23, the SQN correction ON, the game ball correction ON, and a communication start request including the value of SQN and the value of the game ball are transmitted to P units, and the SQN of P units and the number of game balls are transmitted. And correct it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, processing when the operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached P units will be described.

  As described with reference to FIG. 29 and the like, the P platform receives the operation instruction command from the CU, and obtains the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current start port number stored in the current ball related information storage area. The back-up information is stored in the front ball related information storage area as the number of pre-addition subtraction balls and the number of previous start openings, and the data of the current addition subtraction balls and the current start opening number stored in the current ball related information storage area are cleared to zero. In the case of FIG. 37, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached the P units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the P units. As a result, each time the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, or a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in a state where the current number of game balls is 520, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed.

  When the command reaches P units in the second re-transmission, until the operation instruction arrives, P unit uses the current ball related information as the data of the number of addition subtraction balls and the number of start ports as described above. As a cumulative memory. Then, using the accumulated and stored number of balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 490, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port (1) = 1, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 1 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 6 (the number of added balls) −36 (the number of subtracted balls) = 490, and corrects and stores the number of game balls in 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 38, since the command from the CU is input to the P units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the value of the SQN of the command transmitted from the next CU to the P unit is performed. Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous time The current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information are cumulatively added to the data without clearing the data of the previous addition / subtraction ball number and the previous start port number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of game balls is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. Upon receiving this, the P clearing process described above is performed to calculate the current number of game balls = 520−13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of game balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start port count data are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction balls count and the previous start aperture count, and an action response command is created to present the current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start. Clear the mouth count data to zero. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the response data of the motion response. Then, the P units have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 0. Is sent to the CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the P units.

  In the P machine that has received it, since the SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number as the previous ball related information and the data of the number of times of the previous start port without clearing the data Back up data by cumulatively adding the data of the current number of starting ports. As a result, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front start ports (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After the response of the operation response composed of these data is created, the data of the current number of added and subtracted balls and the current number of starting ports are cleared to zero. And as an operation response, the P platform is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1 Send the response to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the P units again.

  In response to this, the P unit determines that the SQN received this time is the value (= n) one before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response has reached the CU. It is detected that there is no retransmission. As a result, the P platform performs cumulative addition storage on the previous ball related information, as described above, creates a response of the operation response, and returns it to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 485, the number of additional balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of times of start port (2) = 2 as operation responses. To the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing for correcting and storing the data of the game balls in the 485.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the P units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unachieved operation response, but information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. In the example of FIG. 38, the case where the operation response from the P platform has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a process when an operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P units will be described. The number of game balls at the current time is set to 520, the number of balls to be added when there is an operation for replaying a stored ball or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is set to 125, and first, as an operation instruction, the CU has an addition request, SQN = n, and A command including data of the number of balls to be added = 125 is transmitted to the P units. However, since the command does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the re-send command has not reached the P units, the corresponding response from the P units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units. In the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the P units do not perform the above-described backup clear process, and the addition / subtraction data and the start port are added to the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information Accumulated addition of count data is stored.

  Then, P units calculate the current game ball number = 520 + 125 (addition request ball number) +6 (current addition ball number) −36 (current subtraction ball number) = 615, and the current game ball number data is set to 615. Create an action response. Specifically, the P platform has an addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 615, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the start as an operation response Mouth (2) Response of number of times = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, and corrects and stores the game ball number data in that 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing when the operation response from the P units (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the initial number of game balls is 520 and an operation for using the game as a replay of stored balls or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and a request for adding 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of game balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the number of balls requested for addition = 125, but the game balls are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 630 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 630, number of addition balls = 6, number of subtraction balls = 21, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition request ball number = 125 is received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtraction balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of game balls to 610, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, the addition update of the game balls is not performed, and the addition update in response to the addition request is performed twice. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU does not reach the P units will be described. A case will be described where an initial number of game balls = 520 and a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 to P units. However, since the command did not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. Since this re-transmission command also did not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches the P units.

  In the P unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as in the process of FIG. 37, each time an additional subtraction ball number and a start winning are generated, the data is accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area. To do. Then, at the stage when the command command for the second operation is input to the P machines, the game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as an operation response, the subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 190, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 Is sent to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190, and corrects and stores the game ball in 190.

  In this way, when subtracting from the game balls, the CU first sends an operation instruction command including data on the number of subtraction requests and the number of subtraction request balls to the P units, and a response as an operation response to the command is received. After waiting for the response to the CU, the subtraction request is subtracted from the game ball. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting game balls and managing the current game balls is on the CU side, the number of balls added and subtracted from the P units on the CU side is different from the game balls that change momentarily as the game progresses on the P units. It is possible to calculate the current game ball by adding / subtracting the game balls only after the response including the motion response is returned, and the game in the CU compared to the P device for the period of waiting for the motion response from the P device. The calculation time of the ball is delayed. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the P units, and even if the current game ball on the CU side is the number of subtraction request balls, In reality, however, there may be no game balls left for the number of balls required for subtraction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when subtracting the game balls, the CU waits for a response of the operation response from the P platform, and subtracts the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, first, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands indicating that there is a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of game balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P units clear the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 210, the number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that the transmission is a transmission, the received command includes the number of subtraction request balls = 300, but the game balls are not subtracted and updated based on the command. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracting balls = 21, number of start ports (1) = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction update is not performed while receiving the subtraction request ball count = 300, and the subtraction update is not performed twice in response to the subtraction request. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 205 + 6-26 = 185, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are sent to the CU . Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520−300 + 12−47 = 185, corrects the number of game balls to 185, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is executed twice. Don't do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a description will be given of a process in the case where the P units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request. The initial number of game balls = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and first, a command of no request and SQN = n is transmitted from the CU to the P units as an operation instruction. . The P platform calculates game balls = 520 + 3-23 = 500 and includes the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), and the data of SQN = n + 1 An operation response is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a game ball based on the motion response and corrects it to game ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands including addition request, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request balls = 125 to the P units. In the P platform, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition refusal OFF, it is determined that a game ball cannot be added on the P units, and there is a difference between the P units and the CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do so, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving the request, the P platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a launch control signal for stopping the launch from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 that has received this stops the drive of the launch motor 18 and stops the game.

  In addition, as for P data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previously subtracted balls = 36, the number of the previous start port (1) = 2, the previous start port (2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 460, Current number of added balls = 3, Current number of subtracted balls = 13, Current starting port (1) times = 1, Current starting port (2) times = 1 Store the data.

  Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the P platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the P platform side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of game balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (current number of added balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 23, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the P units in the communication start request. In response to this, the P platform corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed after sending a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 23 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do.

  Also in the processing of FIG. 43, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the P unit. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a process when the P units return a subtraction rejection response to the CU subtraction request will be described. Since the initial number of game balls is 520, the number of balls to be added is 3 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received once between the CU and the P platform. Then, the game ball = 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like occurs and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU uses a command of subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 500 as an operation instruction. Send to the stand. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of balls to be added is 6 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 36 in P units, and the number of game balls at the present time is 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of game balls (480) is smaller than the number of balls required for subtraction (500), the subtraction request of 500 cannot be satisfied. Therefore, as for the operation P, the subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2 and the response of start port (2) number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response, the CU calculates a game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Unable to subtract due to insufficient game balls”.

Thereafter, normal operation instruction and operation response polling are performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a description will be given of processing when the P units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request. In FIG. 45, the sequence from the part where the CU transmits a clear request is described. For example, in the same manner as in the process of FIG. 31, when a return response 322 is pressed, and a game completion ON operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the CU, as shown in FIG. The command of the operation instruction of clear request present, clear display, and SQN = n + N + 3 is transmitted to the P units. Receiving it, the P stand indicates that it cannot be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) times = 1, start port (2) number of times = 2 response of operation response is transmitted to CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as operation instructions to the P units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the P platform.

  With reference to FIG. 46, a process when P units respond with a permission rejection response to the CU game permission request will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 520, and in the trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, the operation instruction command and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in a state in which P games are prohibited. Then, it is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. However, the P platform returns to the CU an operation response command including, for some reason, a state where the ball cannot be shot, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the P machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a process when the P units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. At the stage of “game prohibition factor generation” in FIG. Assume that a game prohibition factor such as an operation of the return button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a game prohibition request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. In the P machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a process when the P platform returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request of the CU will be described. When the input of the glass door opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 48, as in the processing of FIG. A command to request no glass opening is sent to the P platform. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling with an operation instruction (game prohibition) for the P units for 10 seconds. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for opening the glass and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform sends a response of an operation response including a glass opening refusal ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects glass open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing glass open cancel processing. The glass opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open the glass door” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a process when the P units return a cell open rejection response to the CU cell open request will be described. When an input of a cell opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 49, as in the process of FIG. A command with no open request is sent to the P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling with an operation instruction (game prohibition) for the P units for 10 seconds. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for cell opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response to the operation response including the cell open rejection ON which refuses to release the cell lock for some reason and releases it.

  In response to this, the CU detects cell open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing cell open cancel processing. The cell opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open cell” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a recovery process when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. The command of operation instruction is transmitted to the P machines in the state of SQN = n at the initial number of game balls = 520, and the P machines have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, and subtraction as the operation response. A response including addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. When the response reaches the CU, when the power is cut off at the CU after the SQN = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 500, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units. In the case of the P unit, if the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to be in the play stop state. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is restored and powered off, the CU and the P unit perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current game ball number = 470, current add ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start port (1) number = 2, current start port (2) number = 2 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the communication partners are the same and that both SQNs match, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the recovery process at the time of the power failure generation | occurrence | production on the CU side before operation instruction | indication arrival is demonstrated. The initial number of game balls = 520, and the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 23, the start port (1 ) The number of times = 1 and the response of the start port (2) number of times = 1 are sent to the CU, and after the CU corrects to SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500, the CU receives no request as an operation instruction, A command of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P units. If the command does not reach the P unit and the power is cut off at the CU immediately after that, the P unit determines that the communication has been interrupted if the command has not been received for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response. Then, the transition to the unconnected state is made, and the driving of the hit ball firing motor 18 is stopped to make the play stop state.

  Next, when the CU is restored and powered off, the CU and the P unit perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, current number of added balls = 6, current subtracted number of balls = 36, current start port (1) number of times = 2, current start port (2) number of times = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one than the SQN on the P base side. Therefore, based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Performs processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Assuming that the initial number of game balls is 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent and received back and forth between the CU and the P unit, and then no operation request command of SQN = n + 2 is sent to the P unit. After that, the P units responded as follows: SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) number = 2, start port (2) number = 2 A response was sent to the CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If no command is transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is restored and powered off, the CU and the P unit perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previous subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start ports (1) = 2, the number of previous start ports (2) = 2. Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470-3 = 467, current number of added balls = 0, current subtractive ball = 3, current start port (1) times = 0, current start port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partners are the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) −3 (current number of subtracted balls) = 467, Total number of balls added = 6 (current number of added balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls = 36 (current number of subtracted balls) + 3 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 50 occurs. (A) shows a case where the CU is replaced with a new CU and becomes inconsistent, and (b) shows a case where the P units are replaced with a new P unit and become inconsistent.

  For example, a power failure occurs due to a failure of a CU, and the failed CU is often replaced with a new CU. In the amusement hall, a plurality of CUs are aged by unit stockers. This aging is a standby state connected to a host server. FIG. 53A shows a state in which the failed CU is replaced with the CU that is aged by the unit stocker, connected to the P unit, and restarted. In this case, in response to the recovery request from the CU, a recovery response including recovery data such as the number of game balls and C-ID is returned from the P units. At that time, the CU is connected to the connected partner ( P units) are determined to be different, and the recovery data of P units are not used for correction of game balls. However, the CU stores the recovery data. After that, when the card used at the time of power-off is inserted into the CU, the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is read and sent as a recovery response with the C-ID of the inserted card. It is determined whether or not the C-ID matches, and if it matches, a process for correcting the backup value as follows is performed based on the stored recovery data.

“Number of game balls = 470, accumulated ball total = 6, subtracted ball total = 36, start port 1 total = 2, start port 2 total = 2”
In addition, when the determination result of C-ID does not correspond, the process which transmits the present game ball number contained in the recovery response to the high-order server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. Receiving it, the upper server 801 backs up the current number of game balls received in association with the C-ID. In the case where the determination results of the C-IDs do not match, the player is playing a game during a replacement operation in which the CU fails and is replaced with a new CU that is aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the continuation is given up and another player inserts a card to start the game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for a loss for a player who has given up continuation of the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up continuation of such a game causes the upper server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and associates it with the member card as the current number of game balls backed up. Discharge and exchange prizes. In addition, when a player who gave up continuation of the game leaves the game hall once and then leaves the game hall, the player who has left the game hall is present on the upper server 801 for several days so that the loss can be compensated. The number of game balls is backed up, and the player who visits the store again reads the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and uses the current number of game balls backed up as a ball to the member card. They may be discharged in association with each other so that prizes can be exchanged.

  However, if the card is damaged due to a failure of the CU or power failure, “determination of matching between the C-ID of the inserted card and the C-ID sent as a recovery response” is performed. The process itself cannot be performed. In such a case, a store clerk intervenes to manually correct.

  At the time of manual correction, the display on the P-side display 54 is used. In this embodiment, when power interruption of the CU is detected in the P units, unsent data that could not be transmitted to the CU due to the CU power interruption or the like from the payout control unit 17 of the P units to the display effect control board 53. Commands that require display are sent repeatedly. The display effect control board 53 displays the untransmitted data based on the request. The unsent data here is a series of ball-related information (see FIG. 6) including the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. For this reason, even if the card discharged from the CU is damaged when the power interruption occurs, and the recorded information cannot be read, the data on the CU side is obtained by using the display on the display device 54 on the P base side. It can be corrected to the correct value. Thereby, a player does not suffer a loss.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, the work of replacing a failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes. Therefore, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in which the replacement work can be sufficiently performed, the card is inserted. Even if it is determined that the C-IDs coincide with each other after insertion, the backup data may not be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the number of game balls and the C-ID are transmitted from the unit stocker together with the stocker ID to the upper server 801. , The new CU connected to the P unit transmits the game ball number data corrected based on the recovery data from the P unit to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 stores the data such as the number of game balls of both players. Control may be performed so as to confirm whether or not they match. If they do not match, an abnormality determination is performed and a predetermined abnormality process such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the P platform, the CU may perform data correction by downloading the recovery data from the host server 801. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of game balls and C-ID to the upper server 801 and stores it in the upper server 801 as a backup, and is exchanged for a new CU and connected to the P units. When the C-ID included in the subsequent recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID -Recovery data such as the number of game balls stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows a case where the P base is replaced with a new one after the power is turned off. In that case, first, a startup process is performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the connected P units are different based on the device information response, and does not use the P recovery data for the correction of the game ball. The original P units of recovery data that was installed before the new P units were replaced are manually corrected by the POS under the intervention of a game hall clerk.

  FIG. 54 shows the control when the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 51 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 54, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 55 shows control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 52 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 55, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Initial number of game balls = 520 and prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are sent and received between CU and P units, based on the number of added balls and subtracted balls generated between them When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to P units. If this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the communication is abnormal when the same command is repeatedly transmitted and no response is returned even after the second retransmission. (Communication loss) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the P platform perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current game ball number = 470, current add ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start port (1) number = 2, current start port (2) number = 2 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the SQN on the CU side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 595, the total number of added balls = 6, the total number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of the recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and P units, and game balls = After reaching 500, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of addition request present, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units have SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2). A response of = 2 is transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the case of the P unit, if the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to be in the play stop state. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is restored and powered off, the CU and the P unit perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previous subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start ports (1) = 2, the number of previous start ports (2) = 2. The current number of balls as the current number of balls = 592, the current number of added balls = 0, the current subtraction ball = 3, the current start port (1) number of times = 0, and the current start port (2) number of times = 0 are stored. And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previous addition balls) +0 (the number of current addition balls) −36 (the number of previous subtraction balls) −3 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 592. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 58 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 56 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 58, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 57 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 59, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in between. When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a wagon service request or the like, the CU assumes that SQN = n + 2 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300, the subtraction request is present, SQN = n + 2, and the subtraction request ball. Number = 300 commands are transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting ball launch motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the communication is abnormal when the same command is repeatedly transmitted and no response is returned even after the second retransmission. (Communication loss) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the P unit perform the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current game ball number = 470, current add ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start port (1) number = 2, current start port (2) number = 2 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units, and the backup value is based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units based on the value of the SQN, so that the subtraction request for 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. While subtracting, the subtraction request ball number 300 is not subtracted from the game ball number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a wagon service request for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction request balls = 300, the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 command is transmitted to P units.

  In response to this, PQ receives SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 170, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Send the response to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the case of the P unit, if the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to be in the play stop state. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU and the P platform perform the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and send and receive the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previous subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start ports (1) = 2, the number of previous start ports (2) = 2. Current game ball number = 167, current addition ball number = 0, current subtraction ball = 3, current start port (1) times = 0, current start port (2) times = 0 as the current number of balls And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the SQN of the P units is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery sent in the recovery response The backup value is corrected based on the data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of balls added previously) +0 (the number of balls added previously) −36 (the number of balls previously subtracted) −3 (the number of balls currently subtracted) = 467, Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  The CU restarts the connection sequence by transmitting a device information request when the power is turned on, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P unit do not match, as shown in FIG. The connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 23 is executed instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation. As a result, in response to the operation instruction after recovery, the CU forces the game balls for subtraction cancellation to be added to the P platform side and corrects the SQN so that the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to the P units (see FIG. 23). In response to this, the P platform corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation process is that the P unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the P platform side. When such a rejection of subtraction on the P platform side is performed, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the P platform side should have rejected the subtraction instruction because the remaining points are insufficient. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 62 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 60 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 62, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 63 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 61 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 63, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 64, as in the process of FIG. 31, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 31, a 15-second wait is provided on the P platform, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU for the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and transmits a command including SQN = n + N + 3 as an operation instruction to the P units when the clear request is present and the clear display is in progress, but if the command does not reach the P units, At the stage where the command is not received after the last response is transmitted for 4 seconds, the platform detects the disconnection and stops the driving of the hitting motor 18 to enter the play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the communication is abnormal when the same command is repeatedly transmitted and no response is returned even after the second retransmission. (Communication loss) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the mutual authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and the P platform as in FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, as the previous number of balls, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the number of previous start ports (2) = 0, Current game ball number as current ball number = 500, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current start port (1) number of times = 0, Current start port (2) number of times = 0 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (current game balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, start opening (1) Accumulation = 0, start port (2) Accumulation = 0

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a description will be given of a recovery process in the case where a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the clear request. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 65, as in the process of FIG. 31, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 31, a 15-second wait is provided on the P platform, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU for the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and transmits a command including clear request, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of starting port (1) = 0, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 0 are transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the case of the P device, if the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as in the process of FIG. 23, and the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. CU and P stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 0, the number of previous subtraction balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the number of previous start ports (2) = 0, Current game ball number = 0, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current start port (1) times = 0, Current start port (2) times = 0 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  FIG. 66 shows the control when the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 65 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 66, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 53 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P base side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 24 is inserted. Referring to FIG. 67, in a state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response while waiting. A reply is sent from the P platform to the CU. During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper left of FIG. 67, “None” in the column of “Card type” is displayed on the CU display 312. “0 shot” is displayed in the title column of “game ball”. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 67, the P display units 54 have “0 ball” in the title column of “game ball” and the title column of “card balance”. “0 yen” is displayed. In addition, the display 312 and the display 43 display various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time. For example, in FIG. 67, the number of start times, the number of big hits, the number of chances of change, the number of highest consecutive times are displayed, and the number of start times between special prizes (effective start winning between one big hit and the next big hit) Count) is displayed as a bar graph. Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side includes a monetary amount setting amount display unit, a card balance amount display unit, a replay ball number display unit, a storage ball number display unit, and a ball lending rate display unit. Is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured with a touch panel as described above, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen. By selecting and touching, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 67, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, a game ball is lent out from the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card. If “Replay” is touched, replay can be performed using the possessed ball or the stored ball of the inserted card (member card). If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command indicating no operation request to the P units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the P unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and the display on the P platform side. The device 54 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow displayed from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction described above return a response of game ball = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the possessed ball (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, a command with the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 and a card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the P machines that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and the holding ball have been determined, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 balls” is displayed in the holding ball display column as shown in the third “ball lending screen” from the top, toward the gaming machine. An arrow is displayed and the player is informed that 5000 balls are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the P platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (ball lending)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display section and the card balance display section. As a result, a display indicating that the ball lending is being added (addition display is being performed) is performed. Then, “5000 balls” is displayed on the game ball display section, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display section.

  Next, a response including game balls = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the ball indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is ended, and the “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, on the P platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the ball as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the ball by the display unit 54 is ended.

  As described above, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or addition display is started at the same time between the CU and the P unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the P unit. It can be terminated at its own timing on the P platform side without transmitting a command or the like, and is not restricted by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display unique to the P platform can be performed.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the gaming ball number counter. The in-game ball number counter is a counter provided in the P payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 counts the number of floating balls (difference between the number of game balls fired and the number of game balls discharged from the board) by the game ball counter, and whether the value is 0 or not. To determine the presence or absence of floating balls.

  The in-game ball counter is incremented by +1 when the launching switch (upper) 41a detects firing. The in-game ball counter is decremented by -1 when a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 and when a merged ball is detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. As described above, the current floating balls are counted.

  Furthermore, the game ball counter receives a game prohibition from the CU when the game ball count is 0 (launch is stopped) and the game ball count is other than 0 for 15 seconds, and the game ban is received from the CU. ) Is cleared to 0 when the gaming ball counter does not become 0 even after 15 seconds have elapsed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. 31, the operation of the CU related to the game ball counter will be described. When the return button is turned ON, the CU waits for 15 seconds after sending the game prohibition until the game completion ON is sent from the P platform side. Then, if a game completion ON is transmitted from the P platform side within 15 seconds, it is determined that the game is completed without any floating balls. On the other hand, when a game completion ON is transmitted from the P platform side after 15 seconds, the CU determines that the in-game ball counter is forcibly cleared in a state where there is a floating ball.

  When the floating ball is won after the game ball counter is cleared after 15 seconds in the state where there is a floating ball in the state where there is a floating ball, the winning ball to be awarded due to the occurrence of winning is CU The payout control unit 17 stores the data as unsent data.

  69 and 70 are flowcharts relating to the processing of floating balls. In particular, FIG. 69 shows processing on the P platform side, and FIG. 70 shows processing on the CU side.

  First, processing on the P platform side will be described with reference to FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 31, when the P vehicle receives a game prohibition request from the CU in response to a card return operation, it determines that there is a game prohibition request (SS1). In this case, the P platform prohibits the launch of the ball (SS2), and further determines at this stage whether the value of the in-game ball counter is 0, that is, whether there is no floating ball (SS3). . When the value of the in-game ball counter is 0, an operation response including “game prohibited, game completion ON” is transmitted to the CU. Subsequently, the occurrence of a winning with a floating ball is subsequently determined (SS11). However, when SS2 immediately proceeds to SS3 and proceeds with SS10, a winning with a floating ball cannot occur, so always at SS11. The determination is NO and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in SS3 that the number of in-game ball counter is not 0 after the launch is prohibited, an operation response including “game prohibited, game completion OFF” is transmitted to the CU (SS4). Subsequently, a 15-second floating ball processing timer (wait time) is counted (SS5). And if a win by a floating ball occurs during that time (YES in SS6), winning-related information is transmitted to the CU each time (SS7). Note that the winning-related information is information such as the number of additional balls associated with winning a prize and the number of game balls at the present time. Further, if a foul ball or a merged ball is detected while the 15-second floating ball processing timer is timed, that is, the floating ball is decreased, the game ball counter is subtracted and updated (SS9). . As a result, if the value of the in-game ball counter reaches 0 while the 15-second floating ball processing timer is counted, it is determined YES in SS3, and an operation response including “game prohibition, game completion ON” is sent to the CU. Is transmitted (SS10). If a winning with a floating ball occurs later, it is determined YES in SS11, and winning information is stored as untransmitted data to the CU (SS12).

  On the other hand, if the value of the in-game ball counter does not become 0 while the 15-second floating ball processing timer is timed, it is determined YES in SS13, and the in-game ball counter is initialized ( SS14), an operation response including “game prohibited, game completion ON” is transmitted to the CU (SS10). That is, although the game ball counter is not 0 but the wait time has timed out, an operation response including “game prohibited, game completion ON” is transmitted to the CU at that time. After that, when a winning with a floating ball occurs later, it is determined YES in SS11, and winning information is stored as untransmitted data to the CU (SS12).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the processing on the CU side regarding the floating ball will be described. First, it is determined whether an operation of a return button is detected (SS50). When the operation of the return button is detected, an operation instruction including a game prohibition request is transmitted to the P cars (SS50). Thereafter, an operation response from the P platform is waited (SS51), and if no operation response is received even after a specified time, a retransmission process is performed (SS56).

  On the other hand, when an operation response is received, it is determined whether the operation response is “game prohibited, game completion ON” (SS53) or “game prohibition, game completion OFF” (SS57). When "game prohibited, game completion ON" is returned, it can be determined that there is no floating ball at the time of operating the return button. In this case, YES is determined in SS53, and an operation instruction including a clear request is transmitted to the P units (SS54). Thereafter, the current number of game balls is determined as a game result and the card is discharged (SS55). Although detailed processing is omitted in the flowchart, as shown in FIG. 31, after the operation instruction including the clear request is transmitted to the P unit, the card is cleared from the P unit until the card is discharged. A process of receiving a rejection OFF operation response, transmitting a card return request to the P units, and receiving a card return response from the P units is performed.

  On the other hand, if the response received from the P-unit in SS52 includes “game prohibited, game completion OFF”, YES is determined in SS57. If YES is determined in SS57, the floating ball processing waiting time is counted (SS58). This time is the same as the time measured by the floating ball processing timer of SS5 in FIG. 69, for example, 15 seconds.

  Then, it is determined whether or not winning-related information such as the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, etc. has been received from the P units during the measurement of the floating ball processing waiting time (SS59). Here, for example, when winning-related information on the number of added balls is received, winning is generated on the P platform side based on the floating ball. In such a case, YES is determined in SS59, and the gaming machine information such as the number of game balls is updated on the CU side (SS60). Subsequently, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P units (SS61).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a game completion ON response (SS62). The fact that there was a response of game completion ON before the timing of the floating ball processing waiting time was completed means that all the floating balls were confirmed on the P platform side, and in this case, proceed to SS55, The number of game balls is determined as the game result and the card is discharged (SS55).

  On the other hand, if there is no game completion ON response, it is determined as NO in SS62, and it is determined whether or not a floating ball processing waiting time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed (SS63). When the floating ball processing waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to SS58 again, but when the floating ball processing waiting time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the game completion ON is received from the P unit. Give up and proceed to SS55 to execute card ejection processing.

  The floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side and the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side may be different. For example, it is conceivable that the floating ball processing waiting time for P units is 15 seconds, while the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side is longer than that (for example, 20 seconds). As a result, for example, although the floating ball is finalized at the last stage of time-out on the P platform side, and the fact is notified to the CU together with the number of game balls, the CU side performs time-out determination and card ejection processing Can be prevented.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 or FIG. 31, in the present embodiment, when a game prohibition request is transmitted from the CU based on pressing of the return button, Prohibit games and check for floating balls. And when there is no floating ball, the game completion processing is advanced by transmitting the game completion ON information to the CU, thereby promptly returning the card to the player. On the other hand, if there is a floating ball, wait for the result of the game with the floating ball to be settled during the wait time, and if there is no floating ball, the game completion ON information will be displayed without waiting for the wait time to elapse. The card is promptly returned to the player by proceeding with the game end process by transmitting to the CU. As a result, the game end process can be quickly completed when the floating ball can be processed but the game is not performed.

  In addition, when a winning is generated by a floating ball during the wait period, information on the number of additional balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU, so that the number of game balls of the player can be accurately grasped on the CU side.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of game balls is 0 (launching is stopped) and the number of balls in game is other than 0 for 15 seconds, the value of the game ball counter is set to 0. As a result, the game completion process can be quickly advanced.

  Further, even if a winning by a floating ball occurs after the game completion process is forcibly set to 0 in the gaming ball counter, as shown in SS12 of FIG. 69, the winning is achieved. Since the information is stored as untransmitted data to the CU, the player can be compensated later based on the storage. The untransmitted data in this case is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 and displayed on the display unit 54 as shown in FIG. As a result, both the player and the attendant at the game hall can grasp the unprocessed prize balls. This prize ball is compensated for by the player by, for example, a POS operation by an attendant.

  69 and 70, the P platform transmits a game completion ON to the CU if the floating ball is determined before the floating ball processing waiting time elapses, and the floating ball processing waiting time. If no floating ball is determined before the time elapses, a game completion ON is transmitted to the CU as a time-out. However, the game completion ON information to be transmitted when the floating ball is determined before the time-out is different from the game completion ON information to be transmitted after the time-out so that the CU can clearly distinguish between the two. May be. In this case, for example, when the game completion ON information after the timeout is received on the CU side, the game completion ON is notified, for example, that the indeterminate floating ball is present (for example, displayed on a display). Different processing may be executed depending on the difference in information.

  Further, in SS12 of FIG. 69, when a winning is detected after transmitting the game completion ON, it is considered that the floating ball has been delayed and the winning information is stored as untransmitted data to the CU. However, the possibility that the player has illegally generated a prize cannot be denied. For this reason, when winning is detected after transmitting the game completion ON, the fact may be notified on the P platform side or the CU side. Alternatively, in addition to the notification, the number of winning balls based on the winning is written on a card different from the card used by the player, or P screens are used for manual correction by a staff member of the game hall Or the number of prize balls may be displayed.

  As described above, the case where the game result is unconfirmed when the return button is operated has been described by taking the ball ball game machine as an example. However, in the case of a slot machine (hereinafter referred to as “S”) which will be described later, There is no ball. However, in the case of S units, a situation is assumed in which the reels are rotating when the return button is operated, and therefore the game result is indeterminate. In such a case, after the CU sends a game prohibition ON operation instruction to the S units, the S units are set in a game prohibition state by prohibiting the setting of a new bet number, and the CU is prohibited from playing games and games. Returns completion OFF. Thereafter, the S units start counting a certain wait time, and if a reel stop operation is performed during that time and the game result is confirmed, a game completion ON is transmitted to the CU at that stage. On the other hand, if the reel does not stop even after the wait time elapses, a game completion ON is transmitted to the CU at that time, and the process proceeds to a card ejection process as in the case of the ball game machine. In this case, if the reel stops thereafter and a winning occurs, it should be given to the player as unsent data to the CU based on the winning or the winning as in the case of the ball game machine The holding points are stored and displayed on a display provided on the S platform.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 71 to 73, regarding the communication sequence between the CU and the P payout control unit, when there is an addition request from the card unit side, there is a subtraction request, and an operation mode switching request. The case where there is will be described.

  FIG. 71 shows a communication sequence when there is an addition request from the CU. As shown in the figure, in a state where there is no addition request, the bit indicating “addition display” of the operation instruction transmitted from the CU to the payout control unit is OFF. In the present embodiment, as shown in Note 1, a bit of “addition display” is provided for each addition factor. In the communication sequence diagram, the bit at the time of replaying the stored ball is “addition display ( Replay) ”, and the bit when the prepaid card balance is consumed is described as“ addition display (prepaid lending) ”.

  As shown in the figure, when an addition factor occurs in the state where the number of game balls is 50, the “addition display” bit corresponding to the addition factor (replay of stored balls, prepaid consumption, etc.) is turned ON, and an addition request is made. An operation instruction command is transmitted to the payout control unit. This operation instruction command further includes the number of balls requested for addition. In this case, on the CU side, the SQN included in the operation instruction and the value after updating the number of game balls with the number of balls requested for addition are backed up. At this stage, the CU determines the consumption corresponding to the addition request (prepaid consumption, consumption of stored balls due to replay of stored balls).

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 17 that has received this operation instruction transmits the received addition request ball number and bit data indicating ON during addition display to the display effect control board 53 (see FIG. 91). The display effect control board 53 receives the data, determines an addition factor, and performs an addition animation display on the display 54.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 17 returns an operation response including the number of game balls after the addition update (= 175) to the CU. On the CU side, addition display (50 → 51 → 52 →...) Of the number of game balls is performed on the display 312 from the time when the operation instruction command specifying the number of balls to be added is transmitted. Eventually, when the addition display on the CU side ends, the CU transmits an operation instruction for switching from ON to OFF during the addition display to the payout control unit. Based on this, the payout control unit transmits an OFF command during addition display to the display effect control board 53 (see FIG. 91). As a result, the addition animation display on the P-side display 54 controlled on the display effect control board side also ends in conjunction with the end of the addition display on the CU side.

  Next, the case of a subtraction request will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of a subtraction request, the subtracting display bit is turned ON in the CU command during operation. As in the case of the addition request, subtraction display is being performed for each factor of subtraction request as shown in Note 1 and Note 2. A bit is defined.

  As shown in the figure, when a subtraction factor for a wagon service or a ball split occurs in a state where the game ball is 5000, the CU indicates that the subtraction display bit corresponding to the subtraction factor is ON and the subtraction request is present and the number of subtraction request balls. Is sent to the payout control unit. The CU also backs up the SQN and the number of subtraction request balls included in the operation instruction. However, the CU does not determine the subtraction at this stage. That is, the stored number of game balls is not subtracted and updated.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit that has received this operation instruction transmits the received subtraction request ball number and bit data indicating ON during subtraction display to the display effect control board 53 (see FIG. 92). The display effect control board 53 receives the data, determines the subtraction factor, and displays the subtraction animation on the display 54.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit returns an operation response including the number of game balls after subtraction update (= 4000) to the CU. On the CU side, the number of game balls is subtracted and displayed on the display 312 (5000 → 4999 → 4998 →...) From the time when the operation instruction command specifying the number of balls required for subtraction is transmitted. Eventually, when the subtraction display on the CU side ends, the CU transmits an operation instruction for switching from ON to OFF during subtraction display to the payout control unit. Based on this, the payout control unit transmits a subtraction display OFF command to the display effect control board 53 (see FIG. 92). As a result, the subtraction animation display on the P-side display 54 controlled on the display effect control board side also ends in conjunction with the end of the subtraction display on the CU side.

  Next, the case of operation mode switching will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a case will be described in which the operation mode is switched to either the maintenance mode or the trial hit mode by remote control operation.

  First, when a remote control operation for mode switching is performed, a mode switching signal is input to the CU. Then, the CU determines whether or not the card balance is 0 and the number of game balls is 0 (0 yen 0 ball state). If either the card balance or the number of game balls is not 0, the mode switching signal input by remote control operation is ignored. On the other hand, when the card balance is 0 and the number of game balls is 0, the CU transmits a mode change request command to the payout control unit. This mode change request includes the type of mode designated by the remote control operation (transition destination mode) and other additional information.

  The payout control unit that has received the mode change request transmits the mode change request to both the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53, and notifies the mode change content (transition destination mode) (FIG. 80). , See FIG. However, when a certain condition is not satisfied, the payout control unit does not transmit a mode change request to the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53, and returns a mode change response of result = NG. A reply is sent to the CU (not shown). In this case, the mode cannot be switched.

  The fixed conditions are two conditions for the main control board 16: "(1) 0 yen 0 ball state, (2) The number of balls in game is 0". That is. On the other hand, for the display effect control board 53, “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state, (2) the number of playing balls is 0, (3) mode change from the main control board 16”. That is, all three conditions “the response result is OK” are satisfied.

  That is, when the payout control unit receives a mode change request from the CU, it first determines that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, and if both conditions are satisfied, the main control is performed. A mode change request is transmitted to the board 16 to notify the mode change contents (transfer destination mode). Then, the payout control unit waits for a result (OK or NG) from the main control board 16. If the result from the main control board 16 is OK, then a mode change request is sent to the display effect control board 53 to notify the mode change contents (transition destination mode) and to the CU, Returns a mode change response with result = OK. However, if the result from the main control board 16 is NG, a mode change response of result = NG is returned to the CU without sending a mode change request to the display effect control board 53.

  Note that “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state” has already been determined on the CU side, but the determination is based on the data stored in the CU, while the payout control unit Since this determination is based on the data stored in the payout control unit, the data used for the determination differ between the two determinations. Further, FIG. 80 shows a communication sequence related to operation mode switching between the payout control unit and the main control board 16.

  As a result, when the above three conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, a mode change request is transmitted to the display effect control board 53 (see FIG. 96), and the result is sent to the CU. An OK mode change response is sent. The CU receives the result OK mode change response, and operates in accordance with the operation mode designated by the remote controller. That is, the CU changes the mode upon receiving this mode change response. Then, a screen corresponding to the mode is displayed on the display 312 of the CU. For example, in the maintenance mode, a maintenance screen is displayed on the display 312 and various settings can be made using the touch panel.

  The maintenance screen is also displayed on the P-side display 54, and various settings can be made by the touch panel. However, the maintenance screen may be displayed on one of the CU and P display units.

  On the other hand, the operation modes of the P units that have transmitted the result OK mode change response are switched by the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53. As a result, for example, in the maintenance mode, a maintenance screen is displayed on the display unit 54, and various settings can be made using the touch panel.

  Thereafter, when an operation to switch back to the sales mode is performed by the remote controller, a mode change request for designating the sales mode is transmitted from the CU to the payout control unit. Upon receipt of this, the payout control unit transmits a mode change request to the main control board 16 and determines the above conditions (1) to (3). A change response is returned to the CU. In this case, the CU transmits a mode change request for switching to the sales mode to the display effect control board 53. As a result, the mode is switched to the sales mode.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined on the CU side that the 0 yen 0 ball state is also determined on the P payout control unit side, and only when the determination is made on both sides, The mode can be switched (however, the mode is not switched unless it is determined that the condition is satisfied on the main control board side). For this reason, it is possible to more reliably prevent mode switching from being performed in a state where there is a game ball or a card balance.

  The control of the payout control unit in FIG. 73 can be performed as follows. That is, when the payout control unit 17 receives the mode change request from the CU, the main control board 16 and the display effect control board are determined without determining whether or not the conditions (1) to (3) for the mode change are satisfied. A mode change request is transmitted to both of them. Subsequently, the payout control unit 17 determines whether the above conditions (1) to (3) for mode change are satisfied, and if all are satisfied, returns the result OK to the CU and switches the mode, and at least one is satisfied. If not, the result NG is returned to the CU and the mode is not switched.

  When such control is performed, the payout control unit determines that the condition of “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state” or “(2) 0 in-game balls is not satisfied” and the mode is changed. In spite of not being performed, there is a case where the mode is changed on the display effect control board side and the main control board side. However, for example, “(1) 0 yen 0 ball state” or “(2) number of in-game balls is 0” will be established over time. Therefore, even if the CU receives the result NG from the payout control unit side, the CU repeatedly transmits a mode change request to the payout control unit 17, and eventually the above-mentioned "(1) 0 yen 0 ball state" and "(2) game middle ball When the number is “0”, the payout control unit 17 switches the mode with a delay to the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53.

  Although switching by remote control operation has been described here, an operation unit for switching the mode is provided on the CU side, and a mode switching signal is generated by operating this operation unit. Based on this, the mode change request may be transmitted to the payout control unit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by turning on both the pseudo card unit and the P units after connecting the pseudo card unit, a mode change request as shown in FIG. 73 is transmitted from the pseudo card unit, Switch to test mode. However, instead of this, the test mode may be switched by a remote control operation in the same manner as the maintenance mode and the trial hit mode.

  Further, instead of the remote control operation or in addition to the remote control operation, a mode switching command signal from a management device such as the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU, and the CU selects a mode based on the switching command signal. A change request may be transmitted.

  Alternatively, a command signal by a remote control operation or a command signal from the management device may be directly input to the P platform without going through the CU, and the P platform may switch the mode in response to the command signal. .

  As described above, since the P units receive the mode change request from the CU and change the mode, it is possible to provide a gaming system having a high degree of cooperation between the CU and the P unit with respect to mode switching.

  Next, communication between the payout control unit and the main control board 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 80. First, communication commands will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16 includes “apparatus information request” for requesting the main control board 16 to transmit the main chip ID, and the main control board 16 for the number of prize balls. There are a “table state inquiry request” for requesting transmission of gaming machine information and a “mode change request” for requesting the main control board 16 to change the operation mode. Among these commands, the stand status inquiry request includes SQN.

  The command transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 includes a “device information response” for sending a chip ID and the like to the payout control unit 17, and a gaming table such as the number of winning balls to the payout control unit 17. There are a “table status inquiry response” for transmitting information and a “mode change response” for transmitting an operation mode change result to the payout control unit. Of these commands, the stand status inquiry response includes SQN.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the “device information response” includes information of a main chip ID, a chip manufacturer code, a gaming machine manufacturer code, and a gaming machine product code. In addition to the SQN, the “table status inquiry response” includes various information to be transmitted from the P payout control unit to the CU, such as the number of winning balls, the number of symbols determined, and the gaming table status. The payout control unit 17 transmits various types of information to the CU based on the “table status inquiry response” received from the main control board 16.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the “mode change request” includes type information of the designated operation mode. The “mode change response” includes a processing result, that is, a result indicating whether or not the mode has been changed. If the result is NG, data indicating the cause may be further included in the “mode change response”.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining SQN control between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17. As shown in FIG. 74, the stand status inquiry request transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16 and the stand status inquiry response sent from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 include SQN. It is.

  When receiving a table status inquiry request from the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 transmits a table status inquiry response with SQN obtained by adding 1 to the SQN included therein and stores the transmitted SQN. Similarly, when the payout control unit 17 receives a stand state inquiry response from the main control board 16, it sends out a stand state inquiry request in which SQN obtained by adding 1 to the SQN included therein is stored as SQN. To do.

  When the main control board 16 receives a command for requesting a vehicle state inquiry from the payout control unit 17, as shown in FIG. 77, the SQN added to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the currently received command. If they match, it is determined that the SQN is normal. In this case, the command including the scheduled information is transmitted as it is.

  On the other hand, the SQN value added to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time. If the latter is large, it is determined that the SQN is abnormal (advance control unit side advance), and the SQN is to correct. That is, the value added to the stored SQN is stored again. As a result, the next command of the table status inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 includes SQN that is added to SQN included in the command received from the payout control unit 17. However, information such as the number of game balls included in the table status inquiry response is not corrected. This is because the fact that the SQN on the payout control unit side has advanced means that the table status inquiry response transmitted one time before has reached the payout control unit 17.

  On the contrary, the SQN value added to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time. If the former is large, it is determined that the SQN is abnormal (delay control unit side delay) and sent last time. Calculate the sum of the data such as the number of game balls included in the table status inquiry response and the updated data such as the number of game balls thereafter, and include the total value in the table status inquiry response. Send. The reason why the SQN on the payout control unit side is delayed is that the table status inquiry response transmitted once before has not reached the payout control unit 17. In addition, when transmitting a total value, SQN after correction is added.

  On the other hand, when the payout control unit 17 receives the command of the base state inquiry response from the main control board 16, as shown in FIG. 77, the SQN included in the command received this time and the value added to the previously transmitted SQN are added. Are compared, and if they match, it is determined that the SQN is normal. In this case, the received information (the number of game balls, etc.) is captured.

  On the other hand, the value added to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time. If the latter is large, it is determined that the SQN is abnormal (advanced to the main control board). In this case, there is a possibility that the payout control unit side has not received the table status inquiry response from the main control board 16 even though there is a table status inquiry response that was transmitted immediately before.

  On the contrary, the SQN value added to the previously transmitted SQN is compared with the SQN included in the command received this time. If the former is large, it is determined that the SQN is abnormal (main control board side delay). In this case, the received table status inquiry response is already received data.

  Regardless of whether the value added to the previously transmitted SQN is smaller or larger, the payout control unit 17 discards the received information and retransmits the command of the table status inquiry request. As a result, when the command of the previous table status inquiry response from the main control board 16 has not been reached, a table status inquiry response including the sum including the amount of the failure has been returned, or If the table status inquiry response command sent from the main control board 16 has already been transmitted, the next new table status inquiry response is returned.

As a result, the payout control unit can receive necessary information without omission.
Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80.

  First, referring to FIG. 78, a description will be given of when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, a device information request command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 17 to the main control board 16, and the main control board 16 waits for this command and returns a device information response including the main chip ID and the like. To do. The payout control unit 17 transmits various types of information included in the received device information response to the CU.

  Thereafter, the payout control unit 17 transmits a stand state inquiry request for setting SQN = 0 to the main control board 16. With this as an opportunity, the table state inquiry request and the table state inquiry response are exchanged between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 while updating the SQN. When the main control board 16 receives the stand status inquiry request with SQN = 0, it returns a stand status inquiry response indicating that the gaming stand is reset ON. As shown in the figure, the main control board 16 continues to return a base state inquiry response of the game base reset ON for 30 seconds after the power is turned on only during the cold start. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the CU of a game machine reset.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the game will be described. During the game, in response to the table state inquiry request from the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 notifies the change of the number of winning balls and the number of symbols determined during the game in detail using the table state inquiry response. The main control board 16 includes a predetermined storage area 1 for storing changes in the number of winning balls, the number of winning prizes, the number of symbols determined during the game, and the like. The main control board 16 sets the data such as the number of winning balls to the number of winnings stored in the storage area 1 in the transmission buffer when transmitting the table status inquiry response, and stores the data in another storage area. Back up to 2. Then, at that stage, the storage area 1 is cleared, so that a newly generated prize ball, winnings, etc. can be stored in the storage area 1 again. After that, the set transmission buffer data is transmitted as a base state inquiry response.

  Next, when a table status inquiry request with a correct SQN is transmitted in response to the transmitted table status inquiry response, the storage of the number of winning balls to the number of winning prizes backed up in the storage area 2 is cleared.

  On the other hand, as shown in the figure, when the table status inquiry request of the same SQN = m as the previous time is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 because the table status inquiry response of SQN = m + 1 has not reached the payout control unit 17, The control board 16 determines that the previously transmitted data has not arrived and the data needs to be retransmitted.

  In this case, the main control board 16 stores data such as the number of prize balls to the number of prizes backed up in the storage area 2 and the prize balls stored in the storage area 1 from the previous command transmission to the present. The sum of data such as the number of pieces to the number of winning prizes is set in the transmission buffer, and a base state inquiry response based on the set data is returned. As a result, to the payout control unit 17, various data included in the table state inquiry response that has not been delivered last time, and data such as the number of winning balls to the number of winnings collected by the main control board 16 after that, Will be delivered.

  As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency of the information while reliably transmitting the information by resending the undelivered information.

  Note that the various types of information included in the table status inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 in FIG. 79 are included in the operation response transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU. That is, of the command data of the table status inquiry response shown in FIG. 75, information from the number of winning balls to the gaming table error status is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 as a table status inquiry response. The payout controller 17 includes the operation response and transmits it to the CU. Specifically, when a winning occurs, the main control board 16 calculates the number of winning balls based on the winning, and the calculation result is included in the table state inquiry response as the number of winning balls, and the payout control unit from the main control board 16 17 is transmitted. The payout control unit 17 adds and updates the number of winning balls to the additional ball counter, and includes the value of the additional ball counter as an additional ball in the operation response at the timing of transmission of the operation response to the CU. Send.

  For this reason, for example, during the game, various information included in the table status inquiry response transmitted from the main control board 16 in FIG. 79 corresponds to the operation response shown in FIG. 29 or FIG. 30, which also shows the communication sequence during the game. It is included and transmitted from P units to the CU.

  Next, the case of operation mode switching will be described with reference to FIG. When the payout control unit 17 receives the mode change request from the CU, the payout control unit 17 transmits the mode change request to the main control board 16. This mode change request includes the type of requested transfer destination mode. When receiving the mode change request, the main control board 16 determines whether or not the mode change condition is satisfied. As shown in the figure, the conditions for changing the mode are all three conditions: "(1) The design is not changing, (2) Not being a big hit, (3) Not being a big hit" It is.

  As a result, for example, when the symbol is changing in the variable display device, mode switching is not performed because the condition (1) is not satisfied. In this case, the main control board 16 returns a result = NG mode change response to the payout control unit 17 (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the above three conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, a result OK mode change response is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. The main control board 16 switches to the requested mode. As a result, the operation mode designated by the CU is changed.

  Thereafter, when an operation for switching back to the sales mode is performed by the remote controller, a mode change request for designating the sales mode is transmitted from the CU to the payout control unit 17. Receiving this, the payout control unit 17 transmits a mode change request to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 again determines the above three conditions, and when all three conditions are satisfied, returns a result OK mode change response and switches the mode to the sales mode.

  Next, communication between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, communication commands used between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. Between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53, one-way communication from the payout control part 17 to the display effect control board 53 is performed, and from the display effect control board 53 to the payout control part 17 Data is not entered. For this reason, the communication command used between the output control unit and the display effect control board 53 is only a command transmitted from the former to the latter. This command includes the “activation instruction”, “game machine information notification”, “current time notification”, “card insertion notification”, “card return notification”, “mode change request” and “card unit untransmitted” shown in FIG. 7 types of commands “data display request”.

  The “start-up instruction” is a command for notifying the display effect control board 53 that the payout control unit 17 has been powered on.

  The “notice of gaming machine information” is a command for notifying the display effect control board 53 of gaming machine information such as the number of game balls. Details thereof are shown in FIGS. 82 and 83. In particular, FIG. 83 shows information indicating that the information provider of the command is the CU and the main control board 16 among various pieces of information included in the “game machine information notification”. The payout control unit 17 receives the “CU state” and “card balance” from the CU, and generates data corresponding to each of the gaming machine information notification commands based on the received information. Also, the payout control unit 17 receives “the number of winning balls” and “data in other timing state inquiry response” from the main control board 16, and data corresponding to each of the gaming machine information notification commands based on the received information. Is generated.

  On the other hand, FIG. 82 shows data in which the payout control unit 17 itself is an information provider. That is, the payout control unit 17 performs “game ball total number information”, “back ball addition information (addition)”, “game ball firing number information (subtraction)”, “out ball” based on the detection results of various detectors. "Passing information" and "gaming machine error state" are generated and used as data of the gaming machine information notification command.

  The payout control unit 17 transmits the gaming machine information notification command thus generated to the display effect control board 53.

  “Notification of current time” is a command for notifying the display effect control board 53 that a card has been inserted.

  The “card insertion notification” is a command for notifying the display effect control board 53 that the card has been returned. The “card return notification” is a command for notifying the display effect control board 53 that the card has been returned. Details of the “card insertion notification” and the “card return notification” are shown in FIG. For example, the “card insertion notification” notifies the ID of the card inserted into the card unit. Also, the card ID stored in the payout control unit 17 is notified by the “card return notification”. As a result, the display effect control board 53 can compare and determine whether the cards match or do not match.

  The “mode change request” is a command for requesting the mode change to the display effect control board 53. Details of the “mode change request” are shown in FIG. For example, the type of test mode, maintenance mode, trial placement mode, and sales mode is designated by the mode transition designation data.

  The “card unit untransmitted data display request” is a command for requesting the display effect control board 53 to display untransmitted data that could not be transmitted to the card unit. Details of the “card unit untransmitted data display request” are shown in FIGS. 86 and 87. In particular, FIG. 86 shows data in which the information providing source is the payout control unit 17 itself, and FIG. 87 shows data in which the information providing source is the main control board 16. That is, the payout control unit 17 generates a “card unit untransmitted data display request” based on the data generated by itself and the data received from the main control board 16, and sends this to the display effect control board 53. Send.

  As described in [Note] in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the display effect control control board 53 has been displayed on the display unit 54 until receiving the “card unit untransmitted data display request” command. After the data contents are backed up, the contents of this command are displayed on the display 54. If the command received after the next time is a “gaming machine information notification command”, it is determined that there is no unsent data to the card unit, and the received data of the backed up data and this gaming machine information notification command Is reflected in the displayed content.

  For example, when a power failure of the CU occurs and the payout control unit 17 cannot transmit data to the CU, a command of “card unit untransmitted data display request” is transmitted to the display effect control board 53. Thereafter, when communication between the CU and the payout control unit 17 returns to normal due to restoration of power interruption, there is no untransmitted data. As a result, the “card unit untransmitted data display request” command is not transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, and instead, a “gaming machine information notification command” is transmitted. The display effect control board 53 determines that there is no unsent data to the card unit based on the reception of this command. In this case, the display effect control board 53 updates the display content of the display 54 based on the backed up data and the data of the “game machine information notification command” newly received this time.

  Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 97.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88, the case when the power is turned on will be described. This communication sequence is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence shown in FIG.

  When the power is turned on, the activation instruction is transmitted only once, thereby notifying the display effect control board 53 that the payout control unit 17 has been turned on. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification is periodically transmitted. Also, when the payout control unit 17 receives a communication start request from the CU, the payout control unit 17 transmits a current time notification to the display effect control board 53. The display effect control board 53 backs up the current date and time included in this command. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification is repeatedly transmitted. This game machine information notification includes data such as the number of game balls that change as the game progresses, and the display effect control board 53 displays the number of game balls on the display 54 based on this game machine information notification. The information is displayed while being updated, and the received data is backed up each time.

  Next, a case where a card is inserted will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 89 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence shown in FIG.

  First, when a card is inserted into the CU while the display effect control board 53 continues to display the corresponding animation when no card is inserted, the payout control unit 17 turns the gaming machine information ON during the card insertion process. The notification is transmitted to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 starts animation display during communication (animation display indicating that information such as a storage ball is being acquired through communication with the server based on the inserted card).

  Thereafter, when the inquiry of the inserted card is completed, the payout control unit 17 transmits a card insertion notification to the display effect control board 53. The display effect control board 53 backs up the card ID and type data included in the card insertion notification in the card ID storage unit. Then, the display effect control board 53 determines whether or not the received card ID matches the card ID stored last time. If the card ID matches, the future game result is stored in the personal game history stored in the previous time. Performs processing that is used in combination with data. On the other hand, if they do not match, the personal game history data stored last time is cleared, and the future game results are used as new personal game history data.

  In addition, in the display effect control board 53 provided with the display effect control unit 292, as described above, the game history data is accumulated and stored in association with the card ID, but separately from the display effect control board 53, Also in the payout control unit 17, a game history data storage unit may be provided in the LSI 799, and the game history data may be accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit in association with the card ID. Specifically, when the payout control unit 17 stores the card ID received from the card unit 3, the game history data aggregated by the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 is used as the card ID. The game history data storage unit may be stored in association with the game history data.

  Next, the payout control unit 17 displays a gaming machine information notification including addition display (card insertion) ON indicating that the addition display is being performed based on the information specified by the inserted card, and the card balance. Transmit to the device effect control board 53. Based on this, the display effect control board 53 performs an additional animation display. Thereafter, when a gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display is received from the payout control unit 17, the display effect control control board 53 ends the addition animation display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the case of payment (cash insertion) will be described. Here, a case where the card balance is 0 is taken as an example. When 10,000 yen is inserted into the CU in the state where the animation display is continuously performed by the display effect control board 53, the payout control unit 17 turns on the display effect control board 53 during the deposit process. A gaming machine information notification including a card balance of 0 yen is transmitted. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 starts an addition animation display for adding the balance. Thereafter, when the depositing process is completed on the CU side, the payout control unit 17 transmits a gaming machine information notification indicating that the depositing process is OFF and the card balance is 10,000 yen to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 ends the addition animation display and displays a card balance of 10,000 yen.

  Next, the case of an addition request will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 91 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence shown in FIG. 71, and [Note 1] and [Note 2] are the same as those in FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 71, when an addition factor occurs, the “addition display in progress” bit corresponding to the addition factor (settlement of reclaimed balls, prepaid consumption, etc.) is turned ON to the payout control unit 17 from the CU. Then, an operation instruction command for which there is an addition request is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. At the timing of receiving this command, the payout control unit 17 turns on the “addition display” bit corresponding to the addition factor, and displays the card balance and the game ball number related information for the display effect control board 53. The game machine information notification including this is transmitted to the display effect control board 53.

  Upon receiving this, the display effect control board 53 determines an addition factor (recycled ball replay, prepaid consumption), and performs addition animation display according to the determination result. As a result, on the display device 54, a display in which the number of game balls is added in accordance with replay of stored balls or prepaid consumption is performed. The number of game balls to be added and the number of game balls after the addition are included in the game ball number related information.

  Eventually, when a gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display is transmitted from the payout control unit 17, the display effect control control board 53 ends the addition animation display.

  Here, a display example will be described with reference to FIG. When the game ball addition factor is prepaid lending, the display 54 performs display control for displaying prepaid lending animation as shown in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. The prepaid lending animation display changes from the display before prepaid lending as shown in (A1) of FIG. 97 to the display during prepaid lending as shown in (A2) of FIG. 97, and then the prepaid as shown in (A3) of FIG. It becomes the display after lending. In the prepaid lending display, the card balance ("Balance" in the figure) is gradually converted to the value of the holding ball ("Holding" in the figure). Made. When such animation display ends, the display after prepaid lending as shown in FIG. 97 (A3) is obtained. As described above, in the prepaid lending animation display, the value of the card balance is changed to display that the number of possessed balls is increased, thereby specifying that the addition factor is prepaid lending.

  When the game ball addition factor is replay lending, the display 54 performs display control for displaying replay lending animation as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. The replay lending animation display changes from the display before replay lending as shown in (B1) of FIG. 97 to the display during replay lending as shown in (B2) of FIG. 97, and thereafter, as shown in (B3) of FIG. 97. It will be displayed after replay lending. In the replay lending display, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the figure) is not changed, and an animation display is performed in which the number of possessed balls (“held ball” in the figure) gradually increases. When such animation display is completed, a display after replay lending as shown in FIG. 97 (B3) is obtained. In this way, in the replay lending animation display, it is specified that the addition factor is replay lending by displaying that the number of possessed balls increases without changing the value of the card balance.

  Next, the case of a subtraction request will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 92 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence of FIG. 72 already described, and [Note 1] to [Note 3] are the same as FIG. In the communication sequence in FIG. 92, “addition” in FIG. 91 is replaced with “subtraction”, and the addition factor in FIG. 91 is replaced with a wagon order or a ball division as a subtraction factor. That is, when a subtraction factor occurs, the payout control unit 17 turns ON the “subtraction display in progress” bit corresponding to the subtraction factor, and transmits an operation instruction command with a subtraction request to the payout control unit 17 from the CU. Is done. At the timing of receiving this command, the payout control unit 17 turns on the “subtracting display” bit corresponding to the subtraction factor for the display effect control control board 53, and the gaming machine information including the game ball related information. The notification is transmitted to the display effect control board 53.

  The display effect control board 53 that has received this determines the subtraction factor (wagon service, possession split), and performs subtraction animation display according to the determination result. The number of game balls to be subtracted and the number of game balls after the subtraction are included in the game ball number related information.

  Eventually, when a game machine information notification including OFF during subtraction display is transmitted from the payout control unit 17, the display effect control control board 53 ends the subtraction animation display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a case where a game is in progress will be described. When a big hit occurs, a game machine information notification including a big hit ON and a big hit end OFF is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 starts displaying the big hit animation. Thereafter, when the big hit ends and the big hit end stage is reached, a game machine information notification including a big hit ON and a big hit end ON is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 starts displaying an animation indicating the end of the big hit.

  Eventually, when the big hit end effect ends, the payout control unit 17 sends a gaming machine information notification including the big hit OFF and the big hit end OFF to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 finishes the jackpot end animation display and starts the game animation display.

  Next, the case of card return will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 94 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequence shown in FIG.

  When the return button of the CU is pressed, the payout control unit 17 stops the ball firing and prohibits the game. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 31, the payout control unit 17 enters a wait period and waits for game completion when there is a floating ball. Meanwhile, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a gaming machine information notification including ON during card return processing and OFF during clear display. In addition, if a winning occurs during the wait period (between gaming prohibited and gaming completion), a gaming machine information notification including the winning information is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect display control board 53 also displays on the display 54 how the winning game balls have changed.

  Eventually, when the floating ball becomes 0 or the timer of the wait period times out, the game is completed. In this case, a game machine information notification including ON during clear display is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 starts animation display during clear display.

  As described with reference to FIG. 31, a clear rejection OFF operation response is returned from the P unit to the CU in response to the clear request from the CU, and a card return request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. In response to this, the P payout controller 17 returns a card return response to the CU (see FIG. 31), and transmits a card return notification to the display effect control board 53. In response to the card return notification, the display effect control control board 53 starts displaying the card return animation.

  After that, when the card is ejected on the CU side, after clearing the memory of the card ID and its type, as shown in FIG. The operation instruction including is transmitted. In response to this, the P payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a gaming machine information notification including OFF during clear display and OFF during card return processing. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 starts displaying the animation while waiting for the customer.

  However, as described in [Note], the display effect control board 53 has the C-ID backed up by the display effect control board 53 when the card is inserted even after the card is returned, that is, when the customer waiting animation display is started. The type is not erased and stored. For this reason, when the card is inserted next time, the display effect control control board 53 can determine whether or not the card inserted this time matches the card inserted last time based on the data stored and stored. it can.

  Next, a case where untransmitted data to the CU exists will be described with reference to FIG. For example, during a game, if a failure occurs such as the CU turning off the power before the completion of transmission of the number of game balls from the payout control unit 17 to the CU, the payout control unit 17 determines the exact number of game balls immediately before the power cut. However, it is not reflected in the memory of the CU. In such a case, there is untransmitted data to the CU.

  At normal times, the number of game balls related information such as the number of game balls that fluctuates with the progress of the game is periodically transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU and also to the display effect control board 53. As shown in FIG. 95, game ball number related information is periodically transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 as a gaming machine information notification, and the display effect control board 53 receives it. Backed up as received data.

  However, when a communication error or a power failure occurs in the card unit, the newly generated game ball number information cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU. In this case, the payout control unit 17 determines that communication with the CU is impossible. Then, the payout control unit 17 repeatedly transmits a CU untransmitted data display request command to the display effect control board 53 instead of the gaming machine information notification. This CU untransmitted data display request command includes information on the gaming machine error status in addition to the game ball number related information which is untransmitted data. As shown in FIG. 86, the unsent data includes “game ball total number information”, “back ball addition information (addition)”, “game ball firing number information (subtraction)”, “out ball passing information”, “ This includes “game ball earned number information”, “symbol determination times 1 and 2”, “starting openings 1 to 3”, “big winning openings 1 and 2”, and “winning openings 1 to 4”. Further, the gaming machine error state includes an error generating device (card unit, main control board 16, payout control unit 17) and an error number in the device as shown in FIG.

  When receiving the CU untransmitted data display request, the display effect control board 53 backs up the currently displayed gaming machine information. The gaming machine information includes the number of winning balls, the number of times the variable display device is started, and the like displayed as a game history, in addition to the number of game balls, the balance, and the number of balls stored.

  The display effect control board 53 displays the received untransmitted data after backing up the gaming machine information. Note that the data to be displayed includes a gaming machine error state (such as an error number) included in the CU untransmitted data display request. Hereinafter, the CU untransmitted data display request is repeatedly transmitted until the failure is recovered. The display effect control board 53 continues to display untransmitted data until the failure is recovered and a gaming machine information notification is transmitted instead of the CU untransmitted data display request.

  Eventually, when the communication error or power interruption of the CU is restored, unsent data is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU as an operation response. As a result, there is no untransmitted data, and the payout control unit 17 transmits a gaming machine information notification to the display effect control board 53 instead of the CU untransmitted data display request. The display effect control board 53 determines that the failure has been recovered and there is no untransmitted data when the type of the received command is thus switched. Then, the display effect control circuit board 53 displays the untransmitted data that has been displayed up to now and the newly transmitted game for the backup data of the gaming machine information that was backed up when the display of the untransmitted data was started. Information reflecting the game ball number related information included in the machine information notification is displayed on the display unit 54 as gaming machine information.

  The method of reflection differs depending on the type of information included in the gaming machine information notification. As described in the lower part of FIG. 95, (a) the information indicating the accumulated value of the gaming machine information notification information, the game that was transmitted first when the failure of the card unit was recovered Information itself included in the machine information notification is displayed on the display unit 54 as gaming machine information. For example, the game ball total number information corresponds to this.

  On the other hand, (b) information indicating the updated value in each case among the information of the gaming machine information notification, the information included in the gaming machine information notification transmitted first when the failure of the card unit is recovered The sum of the backup data and the untransmitted data is displayed on the display unit 54 as gaming machine information. For example, game ball acquisition number information, symbol determination number, and the like correspond to this.

  As a result, the correct gaming machine information can be displayed on the display 54 after the failure is recovered. In addition to the untransmitted data, the display unit 54 may display data backed up before displaying the untransmitted data.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 95, when the display effect control board 53 receives the CU untransmitted data display request, it backs up the currently displayed gaming machine information. For this reason, after the failure is recovered, the display content can be updated using the backup data. In addition to displaying untransmitted data, backup data may also be displayed.

  Next, the case of operation mode switching will be described with reference to FIG. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 96 is performed in conjunction with the communication sequences shown in FIGS. 73 and 80 already described.

  In the sales mode, display effect control board 53 displays a screen in the sales mode. For example, when the player is playing, the number of game balls of the player is displayed, and when waiting for a customer, a demonstration screen for waiting for the customer is displayed.

  As described with reference to FIG. 73, the payout control unit 17 receives the mode change request from the CU, and when determining that the condition for switching the mode is satisfied, changes the mode to the main control board 16. Request. When a result OK mode change response is received from the main control board 16, a mode change request is transmitted to the display effect control board 53 as shown in FIG. The display effect control board 53 switches the operation mode according to the transition destination mode included in the mode change request. Specifically, the display according to the operation mode designated from the card unit is performed.

  Thereafter, a mode change request for requesting the change to the business mode is transmitted from the card unit to the payout control unit 17, and a mode change request is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. Then, the display effect control control board 53 switches the operation mode to the sales mode and displays the screen in the sales mode.

  Next, management of security related information in the upper server 801 and the card unit (CU) 3 will be described.

  The security related information includes, for example, authentication operation designation information including setting information such as at least a base abnormality detection setting value, a gaming machine test hit mode setting value, and a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. As described above, the security-related information includes predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Further, such security related information includes numerical data indicating the version number of information for the entire security related information. Data indicating the version number of such information is updated (for example, addition update of numerical data of the version number) when any of the security-related information as described above is changed. It should be noted that the version number data of such information is not limited to the case where the security related information is set as a whole, but authentication including a base abnormality detection setting value, a gaming machine test hit mode setting value, and a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. Each data of the operation designation information may be individually set and updated. Such security related information is stored in a security related information storage unit provided in each of the upper server 801, the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  In such security-related information, standard setting information is preset as default data (data of “initial values” of various information described later), and a predetermined input operation such as a keyboard provided in the upper server 801 is performed. In the means, it is possible to change (update) the data by manually inputting the data by the manager of the game hall. Therefore, when no change operation is performed on the security-related information in the upper server 801, the security-related information is set to “initial value” data. When manually inputting security-related information in the host server 801, for example, each gaming machine in the game hall may be manually entered for each gaming machine, or a unified threshold value may be input and set for each model. Is possible. The host server 801 may acquire and use security related information as follows. If the model information of the gaming machine and the setting information of the security related information are associated in advance, that is, if the model information and the setting information of the security related information are in one-to-one correspondence, the setting information is input The model information is downloaded to the upper server 801 from an upper server than the upper server 801 to be set, and the downloaded model information is stored in the upper server 801 so that the model information is one-to-one corresponding to the security. The upper server 801 may select and store the related information, and the security related information may be used. Further, such security-related information can be automatically changed (updated) to predetermined data at a preset timing (for example, a regular timing) without manual input. You may do it.

  The base abnormality detection set value is data for setting the presence / absence of base abnormality detection and its constant (threshold value) when a base abnormality state is detected by the CU 3 or the P stand 2. The base abnormality detection setting value includes a low base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a low base state and a high base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a high base state.

  The low base time threshold value is in the range of 0 to 100%, and the initial value is 30%. Such a low base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and indicates “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the low base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set low base time threshold is performed, and when the low base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the low base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  As for the high base time threshold, the set value is in the range of 0 to 150%, and the initial value is 120%. Such a high base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the high base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set high base time threshold is performed, and when the high base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the high base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  The gaming machine trial hit mode setting value is data for setting the presence or absence of a trial hit mode such as adjustment of a gaming machine nail. In the gaming machine test hit mode setting value, “test hit mode present” or “no test hit mode” is indicated, and the initial value is “no test hit mode”.

  The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value sets the presence / absence of detection of an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls (the number of balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on the firing detection signal) and its constant (threshold value) at the CU3 or P stand 2. It is data to do. The abnormal state of the subtraction balls set here is detected based on the fact that there is a game ball winning in succession for the set number of balls, even though no game balls are fired. The threshold value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the number of winning balls that have been continuously awarded and determined to be an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value has a setting value in the range of 0 to 99 balls and an initial value of 5 balls. Such a subtractive ball abnormality detection setting value indicates “not detected” when set to 0 balls, and indicates “detected” when set to other than 0 balls. Thereby, when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is other than 0 balls, the subtraction ball abnormality detection is performed using the set subtraction ball threshold value, and when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is 0, the subtraction ball abnormality is detected. No detection is performed.

  Such security-related information is transmitted from the higher-level server 801 to the CU3 via the CU3 at a predetermined timing, for example, when communication between the higher-level server 801 and the CU3 is established (communication connection establishment) or when a setting value of the security-related information is changed. Is transmitted to the P platform 2. However, the version number of the security-related information is managed by the upper server 801, the CU 3, and the P unit 2. When the CU 3 and the P stand 2 hold (store) the same version number information as that of the upper server 801 at the predetermined timing, the security related information is not transmitted.

  Next, a specific example of security-related information processing for managing security-related information in the upper server 801, CU3, and P-unit 2 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing processing relating to security-related information in the upper server 801 and the CU3. In FIG. 98, (A) shows security-related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server 801 side, and (B) shows security-related information processing as processing executed on the CU3 side (main control unit 323). An information setting process is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 98 (A), in the upper server 801, when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 starts (for example, it is necessary until the setting change of the security related information is completed by S713 described later). It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined short period after the start of communication establishment (such as a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin to a standard time) (S701). In this case, when the establishment state of the communication connection is started, the host server 801 is always in an operating state, the CU 3 is turned on before the start of business hours, and the power is turned off after the end of the business hours. This means the time when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 starts due to the input. When it is in the communication connection establishment start state, the process proceeds to S703 to be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the communication connection establishment start state, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting is changed in the online state (S702). When the security related information setting is changed, for example, the setting of any one of the base abnormality detection setting value, the gaming machine trial hit mode setting value, and the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value as described above is performed manually (for example, This is a time when the security related information management process is executed after the change by manual change by the operation input of the staff. Specifically, a predetermined change flag is set when the security-related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online, and when such a change flag is set in S702. It is determined that the security related information setting is being changed. Further, such a change flag is reset when it is confirmed that the setting of security related information has been changed in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 in response to the setting change of the security related information in the upper server 801. Further, such a change flag is not set when the security related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. This is because, when the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, even if the setting of the security related information is changed in the upper server 801, the security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. This is because the security-related information after the change can be transmitted to the CU 3 by proceeding from S701 to the processing after S703 described later at the start of the established state of the communication connection when the power is turned on.

  In the upper server 801, the security related information setting is changed when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting the security related information is offline and when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting of the security related information is the online state. It is possible to execute in both cases. However, when the communication state between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is an online state, the security-related information after the setting change can be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. However, when the communication state is an offline state, The security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU3. In this embodiment, in S702, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting has been changed when the communication state with the CU 3 that is the setting target of the security-related information is an online state.

  When the setting of security related information is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, the change flag is set and held. After the next power-on of the CU 3, the S701 is bypassed and the security is performed by the S702. It is determined that the related information setting has been changed (if the change flag is set, it is determined that the security related information setting has been changed) and is the same as when the security related information is immediately changed in the online state. By performing the process, the security related information after the change may be transmitted to the CU 3 after the next power-on of the CU 3. Further, in the upper server 801, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is online. Further, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is offline.

  The setting change of the security related information may be changed by the following method other than the change by the manual operation input as described above. Automatic setting change in which the upper server 801 sets data corresponding to the model of the P unit 2 to which the CU 3 is connected based on the received gaming machine information from among a plurality of setting data stored by itself. May be performed. Further, the upper server 801 is connected to the CU 3 by performing data communication with an external server (for example, a server provided at a gaming machine manufacturer) provided outside the game room based on the received gaming machine information. Setting data corresponding to the P machine model may be downloaded, and automatic setting change may be performed based on the setting data.

  If it is determined in S702 that the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S702 that the security-related information setting is being changed, the process proceeds to S703. On the other hand, when it is determined in S702 that it is not time to change the setting of security-related information, that is, when it is offline or when the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the conditions of S702 are not met. Since it is not necessary to transmit data related to the setting change of the security related information to the CU 3, the process is terminated.

  In S703, it is determined whether the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted (S703). Here, the first security related information version number request command is a command for requesting a response of the version number data of the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P unit 2. Specifically, in S703, it is determined whether the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted to the CU3 in a state where it is determined that the transmission timing of the security-related information is determined in S701 or S702. . Whether or not the first security-related information version number request command has been transmitted to the CU 3 is determined based on whether or not a later-described version number requested flag is set. When the first security-related information version number request command is transmitted to CU3, the first security-related information version number request command is transmitted from CU3 as a second security-related information version number request command as described below. Is transmitted to the base 2. Here, even commands having the same content are referred to as “first” if they are transmitted from the upper server 801 and “second” if they are transmitted from the CU 3.

  When it is determined in S703 that the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted, a process for transmitting the first security-related information version number request command to the CU3 is performed (S704), and the process ends. To do. The transmission in S704 is performed only once, and as described above, the CU 3 that has received the first security-related information version number request command transmits it to the P unit 2 as the second security-related information version number request command. When the first security-related information version number request command is transmitted once in S704, the above-described version number requested flag is reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted yet, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the security-related information version number response is received from the CU3 (S705). Here, the security-related information version number response is a response in which CU3 returns data of the version number of security-related information stored in CU3, and P-base 2 is a security-related information stored in P-base 2. This is a response that returns the data of the version number of the information via the CU3. Specifically, in S705, after it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has already been transmitted, the security-related information version number response from CU3 or the security-related information version number response from P unit 2 is CU3. It is determined whether or not the timing is received via. The security-related information version number response is first returned from the CU 3 to the upper server 801, and then the security-related information version number response from the P unit 2 is returned to the upper server 801 via the CU 3.

  If it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version number response has not been received, the process proceeds to S709 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version response has been received, the version specified by the received security-related information version response and the version stored and managed by the upper server 801 The number is compared (checked) to determine whether or not they match (S706). In the upper server 801, when the security-related information as described above is changed, data indicating the version number is updated. On the other hand, in the CU 3 and the P platform 2, when security related information is received from the upper server 801, the version number data included in the information is stored and managed as updated version number data.

  If it is determined in S706 that the version numbers match, the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P base 2 is appropriate information, and new security related information is transmitted to the CU 3 and the P base 2 Since there is no need, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S706 that the version numbers do not match, the security-related information stored in the CU3 or P table 2 is inappropriate information and is stored and held in the CU3 or P table 2 Since it is necessary to change (update) the security related information to the latest information stored and held in the host server 801, a process for transmitting the latest first security related information to the CU 3 is performed (S707). End the process. In addition, CU3 which received this 1st security relevant information transmits it to P stand 2 as 2nd security relevant information.

  As described above, when the security-related information version numbers do not match in S706, when the security-related information is changed in the upper server 801 when the power of at least one of the CU3 and the P-unit 2 is on, When the security-related information is changed in the upper server 801 when at least one power source of the P base 2 is in the off state, when the power source of at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 is in the off state, the exchange in the off state is performed. When the CU side device or the P base side device is exchanged, when the power of at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 is on, incorrect security related information is stored in the on state due to a communication failure. Noise when the power of at least one of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is on. Security-related information stored in the way of the on-state are included such as when changes to incorrect information by. Here, when at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 is replaced, the security-related information stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 before the replacement and the security stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 after the replacement are stored. The version number may differ depending on the related information. Accordingly, even when such device replacement is performed, the version numbers of the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU 3 or the P unit 2 may not match, so the upper server 801 and the CU 3 or It is necessary to match the security related information stored in the P platform 2.

  Next, timing of the response waiting time is started (S708). Here, the response waiting time is a response (security related information setting to be described later) returned from the CU 3 in response to the transmission of the first security related information (security related information for the CU) from the first transmission. Response), or response sent from P unit 2 via CU3 to the transmission of the information from the time when the second security related information (security information for P unit) is transmitted This is the time until receiving (security-related information setting response described later), timed by a predetermined software timer process, and timed out when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  The predetermined time for which the response waiting time is timed out is, for example, when the security-related information is transmitted when the CU 3 and the P base 2 are operating normally and the communication state between the CU 3 and the P base 2 and the upper server 801 is normal. To a standard time required from when the security-related information setting response is received to a predetermined margin. That is, the predetermined time for the response waiting time to time out is set to a time that allows the CU 3 and the P base 2 to operate normally and the communication state between the CU 3 and the P base 2 and the upper server 801 to be recognized as normal. Has been.

  In S709, it is determined whether the response waiting time has not timed out and is in a response waiting state as a state of waiting for reception of a security-related information setting response from CU3 or P unit 2 via CU3 ( S709). When not waiting for a response, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the response is waiting, it is determined whether or not a security related information setting response is received from CU3 or from P stand 2 via CU3 (S710).

  If it is determined in step S710 that the security related information setting response has been received, it is determined whether or not the security related information setting response is received for the first time. In step S713, the response waiting state is ended, and the process ends. In the case of the second time, the response waiting time measurement ends in S713. On the other hand, when it is determined in S710 that the security-related information setting response has not been received, it is determined whether or not the response waiting time for which timing has been started in S708 has timed out after a predetermined time has elapsed (S711). . If it is determined in S711 that the timeout has not occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S711 that a time-out has occurred, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in information communication, processing for blocking communication between the upper server 801 and CU3 is performed (S712), and a response is returned by S713. End the wait state.

  Note that the process of confirming the version number of the security-related information as described above and transmitting the security-related information to the CU 3 when there is a discrepancy is a regular timing in addition to the timing determined in S701 and S702 as described above. Such as a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, a predetermined period after the transition from the high base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered. As described above, it may be executed at the timing when the gaming state is changed, or may be always executed.

  Further, the above-described S701 determines whether or not the communication connection to the network in the game arcade is established when the upper server 801 is turned on, and the process proceeds to S703 when the establishment is established. Thereafter, it may be determined whether or not the setting of security related information has been changed in S702. In that case, when the setting of the security related information is changed, the above-described change flag is set when the setting of the security related information is changed regardless of whether the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. When the change flag is set, the process may proceed from S702 to S703.

  When the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are always in the power-on state and are always on, the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 except when an abnormal state such as a power failure occurs. Is always established, and whenever the security-related information is changed and set in the upper server 801, the process always proceeds from S702 to S703.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (B), in CU3, in the security related information setting process, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive the first security related information version number request command from the upper server 801 ( S751). If it is determined in S751 that the first security related information version number request command is not received, the process proceeds to S755 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S751 that the first security related information version number request command is received, the version number data of the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3 is confirmed (S753). A process for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the confirmed version number data to the upper server 801 is performed (S754), and the control shifts to S759.

  On the other hand, in S755, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive the first security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 in S707 described above. If it is determined that the first security related information is not received, the control proceeds to S759. If it is determined that the first security related information is received, it is determined whether or not the security related information has already been updated in the CU 3 (S756). If the security related information received in S755 is the first time, the security related information has not yet been updated in the CU3. The received first security related information is the security related information in the CU3. It is stored (updated) in the storage unit (S757). As a result, the first security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 is stored and held in the CU3. Then, a security related information setting response is transmitted to the upper server 801 as a response to the upper server 801 in response to storing the first security related information (S758).

  On the other hand, if the first security related information has already been updated in CU3, a determination of YES is made in S756, the control proceeds to S759, and the P-P security related information processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the base monitoring process is executed not only on the CU 3 but also on the P stand 2 (see FIGS. 101 and 102).

  For this reason, it is necessary to store (update and store) the security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 not only in the CU 3 but also in the P unit 2. Therefore, the information processing related to security for the P unit in S759 is executed.

  In order to determine whether or not the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 is different from that of the CU 3 and the P base 2, the version number of the security related information is transmitted from the CU 3 or from the P base 2 via the CU 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value data of the security related information is transmitted from the CU3 or the P unit 2 via the CU3. You may make it compare whether setting value data correspond. In this way, when the CU 3 or the P unit 2 is replaced, the P unit 2 of a different model is connected to the CU 3, and the set value data of the security related information is different, but the version number of the security related information is different. When the data happens to coincide with the version data of the security related information stored in the higher-level server 801, it is possible to prevent an abnormality from being detected with an incorrect setting value.

  Next, the specific control contents of the information processing related to P-P security in S759 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main control unit 323 of the CU 3 determines whether or not it is time to receive the first security-related information version number request command (S760). When the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted from the upper server 801, the control advances to S761, where it is determined whether or not a security-related information version number response has been received. When the security related information version response has not been sent, it is determined whether or not the first security related information has been received in S762, and when the first security related information has not been sent from the upper server 801, S763. Thus, it is determined whether or not a security related information setting response has been received. If no security related information setting response has been sent from the P base 2, this processing ends.

  If the first security related information version number request command is transmitted from the upper server 801 while the processes of S760 → S761 → S762 → S763 are repeatedly executed, the determination of YES is made in S751 as described above. None After the processing of S753 and S754 has been performed, control proceeds to S759. Then, a determination of YES is made in S760, and a process of transmitting the received first security-related information version number request command as a second security-related information version number request command to P-unit 2 is performed (S764). The second security related information version number request command is determined to be received in S770 in the P-unit security related information setting process shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 100, this P-unit security related information setting process is a process executed by the payout control unit 17 of P-unit 2, and the second security-related information version number request command in S764 described above is the P-unit 2 If YES, the determination of YES is made in S770. Then, processing for confirming the version number data of the security related information is performed (S772). A process for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the confirmed version number data to the CU 3 is performed (S773), and the process ends.

  If the security-related information response in S773 is transmitted to CU3, YES is determined in S761 in FIG. 99, and the main control unit 323 in CU3 transmits the received security-related information version response to the upper server 801. The process to do is performed.

  The upper server 801 that has received this security-related information version number response makes a determination of YES in S705 described above, executes the processing in S706 and S707, and transmits the necessary first security-related information to the CU3. It is. In response to this, the main control unit 323 of CU3 makes a determination of YES through S755, makes a determination of YES through S756, proceeds to S759, makes a determination of YES through S762 in FIG. 99, and receives the received first security A process of transmitting the related information as the second security related information to the P platform 2 is performed (S766).

  The payout control unit 17 of the P table 2 that has received the second security-related information makes a determination of YES through S771 in FIG. 100, and performs a process of storing (updating and storing) the received security-related information (S774). Then, a security related information setting response is transmitted to CU3 (S775).

  The main control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the security related information setting response makes a determination of YES in S763 of FIG. 99, and performs a process of transmitting the received security related information setting response to the upper server 801 (S767). . Receiving this, the upper server 801 makes a determination of YES in S710 described above, and executes a response waiting state termination process in S713.

  Next, a base monitoring process executed by the CU 3 (main control unit 323) in order to monitor the base based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the base monitoring process executed by the CU3. The base monitoring process is executed in a state other than the big hit gaming state.

  In the base monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 has been received (S801). When it is determined that the game ball firing number information has been received, based on the received game ball firing number information, the number of fires counted by the firing information number counter is updated in CU3 (S802), and S803. Proceed to On the other hand, when it is determined that the shipment number information has not been received, the process proceeds to S803 without adding and updating the data of the number of shots. Thereby, in CU3, the number of discharges can be counted and managed.

  In S803, it is determined whether or not the game ball acquisition number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 is received (S803). When it is determined that the game ball acquisition number information has been received, the acquisition number data counted by the acquisition number counter in the CU 3 is added and updated based on the received game ball acquisition number information (S804). move on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball acquired number information is not received, the process proceeds to S805 without adding and updating the acquired number data. Thereby, in CU3, the acquisition number can be counted and managed.

  In S805, it is determined whether or not a predetermined base calculation timing is reached (S805). In CU3, for example, in order to perform a process of calculating a base every time a predetermined time such as one minute elapses, the elapsed time is measured using a predetermined software timer after the card is inserted into CU3, and the timer is set to a predetermined time. Every time a time (for example, 1 minute) is timed out and timed out, it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has come.

  If it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is not reached, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is reached, a process of calculating the base is performed based on the number of fires counted in S802 and the number of acquisitions counted in S804 (S806). Specifically, in S806, the base is calculated by performing an arithmetic operation using an arithmetic expression such as “acquired number / launched number × 100” (%).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low base state (S807). In S807, for example, the current gaming state is in the high base state based on the information indicating whether or not the high base is specified by the data of the “gaming table state 2” transmitted from the P table 2 and received. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in S807 that the base state is not the high base state, that is, the base state is the low base state, the low base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value in the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3. It is set (S808), and the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, when it is determined in S807 that the state is the high base state, the high base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value among the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3 (S809), Proceed to S810.

  In S810, it is determined whether or not the base value calculated in S806 is greater than or equal to the base abnormality detection set value set in accordance with whether or not the high base state is set in S808 or S809. If it is determined in S810 that it is not equal to or greater than the base abnormality detection set value, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the base abnormality detection set value is equal to or greater than S810, an error notification for notifying the occurrence of the base abnormality for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the base is performed on the display 312 (S811). The host server 801 is notified of error information specifying the abnormal state (S812). If it is determined as an abnormality as a result of the base abnormality monitoring in the P stand 2, an error notification is made to the CU in S832, which will be described later, and the main control unit 323 of the CU3 receiving it receives the P in S813. It is determined that there has been an error notification from the stand, error information (P stand error notification) is specified to the upper server 801 to specify that an abnormality has occurred in the base at the P stand (S814 error notification), and the process ends. . As error notification, instead of or in addition to that executed by the indicator 312, an abnormality notification lamp provided in the CU 3 is turned on (or flashes), or an abnormality notification is performed by voice from a speaker. You may make it let. Further, such display, light emission, and sound notification may be performed by a display, a lamp, and a speaker provided in the host server 801, or a display (for example, a display) provided in the P stand 2. Etc.), a lamp, and a speaker. In addition, this error notification should not be performed where a player such as the card unit 3 or the pachinko machine 2 can be confirmed, and should be performed only at a place where only a game manager or a staff member can recognize. Also good. This error notification is not an error notification due to the fact that fraud has been surely performed, but is an error notification of the determination result that there is a possibility that an abnormality due to fraud has occurred. If error notification is given, there will be an inconvenience that a player who has not made any fraud will treat it as if it is fraudulent, and in order to prevent such inconvenience, an error notification will be issued where the player cannot confirm. It is good to do.

  Next, the P base monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control unit 17 of the P platform 2 determines whether or not a shot ball has been detected (S820). If there is no shot, control proceeds to S822, but the shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection switch 903 is detected. If it is input to the payout control unit 17, a determination of YES is made in S820, and the number of fired balls is added (S821).

  Further, it is determined whether or not an additional ball has been received from the main control board 16 (S822). If an additional ball has been received, an acquisition number addition process is performed (S823). Further, the payout control unit 17 determines whether or not a foul ball has been detected (S824). If a foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, a determination of YES is made in S824, and an acquired ball is obtained. Is added (S823). Then, the control after S825 is executed. The processes in S825 to S832 are the same as the processes in S805 to S812 in FIG. However, the error notification destination is CU3 in S832 compared to S812. This is the only difference.

  The error information notified in S812 and S814 includes the date and time of occurrence, error code (major classification data), error information (minor classification data), BB serial number, main control chip information (main chip ID), and payout. Control chip information (payout chip ID) is included. The error information notified in S832 includes occurrence date and time, error code (major classification data), error information (minor classification data), main control chip information (main chip ID), and dispensing control chip information (dispensing chip). ID). Here, the error code is information indicating a large classification error code when the error type is largely classified according to a predetermined classification standard. The error information is information indicating a small classification error code when the large classification error code is classified in detail according to a predetermined classification standard.

  Thus, when it is determined that the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the P unit 2 is inappropriate, error information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate is received from the CU 3. Since the data is transmitted to the upper server 801, the upper server 801 can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

  As described above, the base calculation timing in S805 and S825 and the abnormality detection timing in S810 and S830 are replaced with a regular timing, as described above, for a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state. It may be set at the timing when the gaming state changes, such as a predetermined period after the transition from the base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered. The base may always be calculated when the process is executed.

  The CU3 (main control unit 323) and the P base 2 (payout control unit 17) also execute a subtraction ball monitoring process for monitoring the subtraction balls based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU3 and the P base 2. Is done. In the subtraction ball monitoring process by CU3, the payout control is performed in a state in which it is determined whether or not there is a shot ball based on the game ball shot number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 and it is determined that there is no shot ball. The winning ball detected based on the winning information transmitted from the unit 17 (starting ports 1 to 3, large winning ports 1 and 2, winning ports 1 to 4) is recognized, and the winning ball is stored (held) in the CU3. )), It is determined that an abnormality in the number of subtracted balls has occurred when it is determined that the number of winning balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in the security-related information has been continuously won. In the subtractive ball monitoring process at the P stand 2, the payout control unit 17 recognizes whether or not there is a shot ball based on the information on the number of game balls fired, and in a state where it is determined that there is no shot ball, Security-related information in which a winning ball detected based on (starting ports 1 to 3, big winning ports 1 and 2, winning ports 1 to 4) is recognized and stored in the P stand 2. When it is determined that the number of winning balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in the set value (for example, five balls) is continuously won, it is determined that an abnormality in the number of subtracting balls has occurred.

  Then, when it is determined that a subtraction ball abnormality has occurred, an error notification for specifying the abnormal state and an error notification are performed as in the case of the base abnormality described above.

  In addition to the above-described base abnormality and subtraction ball abnormality, the following security related information is stored in each of the upper server 801, the card unit (CU) 3 and the P stand 2, and the base abnormality and Similarly to the subtraction ball abnormality, a set value transmission process and an error monitoring process may be executed.

  Judgment that determines that the number of possessed balls is abnormal when the difference between the number of retained balls stored in the CU 3 and the number of held balls stored in the P stand 2 exceeds a set value (for example, one ball). A numerical abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

  In the state where there is no winning count based on the information on the number of game balls acquired transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3, the winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3 (starting ports 1-3, large winning ports 1, 2) The addition ball abnormality that the CU 3 determines to be an abnormality of the addition ball when a winning ball is detected based on the prize winning openings 1 to 4) may be used as the security related information. In addition, in the state where the payout control unit 17 has no winning count based on the game ball acquisition number information, the winning ball is determined based on the winning information (starting opening 1 to 3, large winning opening 1 and 2, winning opening 1 to 4). An addition ball abnormality that the P stand 2 determines as an addition ball abnormality when detected may be used as the security-related information.

  Based on the game ball acquisition number information and game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3, it is determined that the CU 3 is abnormal when the number of held balls stored in the CU 3 becomes a negative value. A minus ball abnormality may be used as the security-related information. Also, the payout control unit 17 determines that the P stand 2 is abnormal when the number of possessed balls stored in the P stand 2 becomes a negative value based on the game ball acquisition number information and the game ball firing number information. A negative ball abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

  Based on the winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 (starting ports 1 to 3, large winning ports 1 and 2, and winning ports 1 to 4), the number of winning balls per unit time has exceeded the set value. Sometimes, the unit-time winning ball number abnormality in which it is determined that the CU 3 is abnormal may be managed as the security-related information, and the payout control unit 17 receives the winning information (starting ports 1 to 3, large winning ports 1 and 2, Based on the winning mouths 1 to 4), the unit-time winning ball number abnormality that determines that the P stand 2 is abnormal when the number of winning balls per unit time exceeds a set value is managed as the security-related information. May be. In that case, as setting values, a first setting value for a big hit gaming state (for example, 50 balls / minute) and a second setting value for a non-hit gaming state (for example, 10 balls / minute) It can be managed separately.

  Using the difference in ball number abnormality that determines that CU3 is abnormal when the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of recovered balls transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3 is equal to or greater than a set value, is used as the security related information. Moreover, when the payout control unit 17 determines that the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of balls to be collected is equal to or greater than a set value, the difference in the number of balls is determined to be abnormal for the P stand 2 to be abnormal. It may be used as information.

  Corresponding to the probability of occurrence of jackpot, the start count is abnormal when the average start count for jackpot as the average start count required for one jackpot occurrence (variable display device fluctuation start count) falls below the set value. May be provided, and the abnormality determination value may be managed as security related information.

  Further, as the security related information, in addition to the authentication operation designation information described above, authentication control information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 and the P stand 2, and such authentication control information is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the CU 3. You may make it memorize | store and manage with P stand 2. FIG. Here, the authentication control information is predetermined setting information including threshold data related to the various types of authentication described above, and whether or not the setting information is transmitted at the same timing as the authentication operation specifying information described above. Similar to the authentication operation designation information described above, the information is only displayed when the version number stored in the upper server 801 does not match the version number stored in the CU3 or the version number stored in the P unit 2. What is necessary is just to make it transmit.

  Thus, as the security-related information, predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Then, such setting information data is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3 and further to the P unit 2 via the CU3, and stored in the upper server 801, the CU3 and the P unit 2, and in the CU3 and the P unit 2 This is used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate.

  As the base abnormality detection setting value, a low base time threshold value used in the low base state and a high base time threshold value used in the high base state are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a big hit time threshold value used in the big hit game state is provided and transmitted from the upper server 801 in the security related information, and used for abnormality detection in the same manner as the low base time threshold value and the high base time threshold value. Also good. In this case, the base may be calculated even during the big hit gaming state, and the calculated base may be compared with the big hit threshold value to detect the base abnormality during the big hit.

  Further, based on the C-ID (card ID) inserted into the CU 3 and the game information corresponding to the C-ID, a player having a high occurrence frequency of an abnormal state such as a base abnormality is identified, and the player Security-related information so that anomaly can be determined using special security-related information in which data such as threshold values that are different from those of other players (for example, threshold values that are easier to detect abnormal states) are set. By setting the data, the setting contents of the security related information may be varied according to the occurrence frequency of the abnormal state.

  As described above, the setting information related to the security related information such as the base abnormality detection setting value is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 and further to the P unit 2 via the CU 3, and the CU 3 and the P unit 2 store them. By monitoring the abnormality related to the security related information such as the base abnormality in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 based on the setting information, the upper server 801 can monitor the abnormality related to the security related information by itself. The processing burden can be reduced. Furthermore, since the higher-level server 801, the CU 3, and the P platform 2 share the security-related information monitoring process, it is possible to perform abnormality determination using a more detailed threshold. Even in such a case, the host server 801 only manages the set value, and the CU 3 and the P unit 2 only make an abnormality determination based on the transmitted set value, so that an increase in the processing burden on both is suppressed. be able to.

  Furthermore, in order to monitor the abnormality regarding the security related information on both the CU side and the gaming machine side, the following effects are produced.

  When an abnormality occurs on the gaming machine side or when fraud is performed, the CU side can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming information sent from the gaming machine side is abnormal, and the abnormality can be detected. For example, in determining the base abnormality, even if the gaming machine side is cheated and the abnormality detection function on the gaming machine side is disabled, the abnormal value base value data is transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU. An abnormality can be judged on the side.

  In addition, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, for example, when an illegal operation is frequently performed in which an operation instruction of “addition request ball number” as illustrated in FIGS. 26 and 27 is transmitted from the CU to the gaming machine, In the gaming machine, addition control is performed in accordance with the operation instruction, and when the number of game balls as a result of the addition is transmitted to the CU, the number of game balls stored and managed on the CU side and the number of game balls transmitted are determined. Abnormality can be detected by making a difference. In addition, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, when an illegal action is performed to prevent the “subtraction ball number” shown in FIG. 29 from being transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU, it is stored on the CU side. An abnormality can be detected when the number of game balls being managed is different from the number of game balls transmitted from the gaming machine side.

  Further, as described above, the version number of the security related information stored in the host server 801 and the version number of the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P unit 2 are compared (verified), and the version number is determined. Since the security related information is transmitted when they do not match, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game is continued with the stored setting of the security related information being incorrect. In addition, the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the security related information stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 match, and the security related information stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 is updated. Although it is not necessary, it is possible to prevent unnecessary communication of security related information. Note that security-related information must be sent without comparing the version number at a predetermined timing, such as when the communication connection establishment start state as described above and at the time of changing the setting value of security-related information are made. Also good.

  In this embodiment, the upper management server 801 is taken as an example of a game management apparatus that manages setting information such as threshold values of security related information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the hall management computer 1 may manage setting information such as a threshold value of security related information.

  In addition, in the case of inputting threshold data of security related information in the upper server 801, instead of setting the data directly by inputting, for example, 10%, 20%, 30%. The management is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, setting 1, setting 2,...), And thresholds are associated with the setting stages (for example, setting 1: 10%, setting 2: 20%, setting 3:30). %)), For example, by inputting and setting setting stage information such as setting 1, setting 2, setting 3,..., Threshold value data is indirectly specified and stored in the upper server 801. May be.

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 103, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2b is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left side edge as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front door 2bS opposite to the swing center. The engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS facing the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. When the opened front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS, the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS get over the engaging receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (not shown) is provided on the back surface side of the front door 2bS. When the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engagements against the spring biasing force. The protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS to be unlocked, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector (not shown) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and it is detected that the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS and is locked. The

  A touch panel type display 510 is provided around the reel of the slot machine 2S. The display 510 displays various game histories, unsent data to the CU, error display, and non-business. Various operations during the mode (for example, various settings in the maintenance mode) are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, main data among various data stored on the CU side and the S platform side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the number of points on the S platform is calculated and the current number of points is managed. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent a new game from being started as early as possible when the number of points is less than the minimum number required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). It is a secondary thing used for. In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. Therefore, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function related to the number of points on the S machines side to suppress the costs on the S machines side. is there.

  FIG. 104 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and RAM storage data mounted in the S-side payout control unit (not shown). First, when the power supply is started up in a state where the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, Main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine product code are transmitted from the main control board (not shown), and the main chip ID, chip maker code, gaming machine maker code, and gaming machine product code are While sending to the CU side, the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit itself is sent to the CU side. In FIG. 104, the chip manufacturer code, the gaming machine manufacturer code, and the gaming machine product code are not shown. The main chip ID, chip manufacturer code, gaming machine manufacturer code, and gaming machine product code are stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control board. Since these various codes have already been described with reference to FIG. 6, the description thereof will not be repeated here.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  And when communication interruption occurs during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. On the S side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of communication interruption. Therefore, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the SQN transmitted last. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction has been transmitted or an operation instruction has been received in accordance with the timing of communication disconnection, the SQN stored in the backup until communication reconnection is transmitted last. Either the last received or last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 104, a total of four types of counters including an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, an external output information counter, and a score counter are provided in the current score-related information storage area of the RAM. Yes.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. When a winning occurs in the S units, an addition number signal that can specify the number of points added is transmitted from the main control board to the payout control unit. The payout control unit adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted according to the betting number setting. When a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board to the payout control unit. The payout control unit adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the score (total score) of the player at the current time. The payout control unit adds and updates the point counter by the addition of the addition counter when adding and updating the addition counter, and subtracts the point counter by the addition of the subtraction counter when adding and updating the subtraction counter Update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units transmit the values of the above four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and score point counter) to the CU at the timing of receiving the command. Furthermore, the S units back up the counter values of the three types of the four types of counters excluding the point number counter in the storage area of “previous point related information” every time data is transmitted.

  That is, the value of the addition counter is “addition number”, the value of the subtraction counter is “subtraction number”, the value of the external output information counter is “external output information”, Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous holding point related information”.

  The addition number counter, subtraction number counter, and external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of “previous holding point related information” are then initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count. It is done.

  As a result, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter change the amount of data (points, external output information) since the last data transmission to the CU (untransmitted to the CU). Data) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, the data of addition number, subtraction number, and external output information, which is the current score related information transmitted to the CU immediately before in the storage area of the previous score related information (current score related information transmitted immediately before). Is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding point related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, a total addition number (addition total), a total subtraction number (subtraction total), an external output information total, and a score are stored in a total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S platform. Further, the total subtraction number and the number of points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform. Furthermore, the cumulative number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the total number of external output information with the current point-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Become.

  Note that the CU receives the count value of the score counter in addition to the values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter from the S side, but the score stored by itself is stored in the addition counter and the subtraction counter. Updating based on the value, the count value of the point counter sent from the S platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of points sent from the S platform does not match the number of scores managed on the CU side, the score on the CU side is updated with the number of scores sent from the S platform. It will never be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for instructing the number of points to be corrected to the number of points managed by the CU side, and transmit the command to the S units. Conceivable. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored therein according to the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side. It may be a command indicating.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points based on the value of the addition / subtraction number counter in particular, and manages it. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the score becomes 0, the score is also stored on the S platform side. However, a score counter for storing the score on the S side may not be provided.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the score is stored on the S side, but it can be determined whether or not the score matches the score stored and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of points stored on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. May be received to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined number of stored medals from a storage area for storing stored medals in response to an input requesting the use of stored medals (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319 provided on the CU). To do. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) and using it for the game, An addition request number for adding the number of points to be deducted to the point number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. In response to this, the S platform side adds and updates the score counter.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service, in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like, is executed, the number of subtraction requests for the player-owned game value is received from the CU side. S is sent to the S side. In response to this, the S platform side subtracts and updates the score counter.

  FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 7, and is a diagram showing storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. In FIG. 105, the gaming machine is changed from P to S compared to FIG. Even in this case, the same control as in FIG. 7 is performed. Since FIG. 105 is the same as FIG. 7, the description is not repeated here.

  As shown in FIG. 105, even in the case of S units, switching between the business mode and the non-business mode is possible. As a result, the S unit switches the operation mode to the sales mode, the maintenance mode, the test hit mode, and the test mode in response to the mode change request from the CU in the same manner as the P unit.

  The maintenance mode, trial hit mode, and test mode for the S units are similar to those for the P unit. FIGS. 8 to 10 show each mode of the P units, but the transition operation method and the end operation method of each mode in the S unit are the same as those shown in FIGS. Also, in each mode of the S units, the score management is not performed (data relating to the score is not transmitted to the CU), the game history data such as the number of big bonuses and the number of symbol rotations is not backed up, and the gaming state in the mode Will be carried over even after the mode is changed.

  The mode transition conditions are “score = 0 and card balance is 0”, “design is not changing in variable display device”, and “not in big bonus”. Furthermore, “betting number setting = 0” may be added.

  The condition for ending the mode is “the symbol is not changing in the variable display device”. Furthermore, “betting number setting = 0” may be added.

  In the maintenance mode, for example, a setting that replaces the big hit described in FIG. 8 with a big bonus is possible. During the test mode, for example, tests of partial functions such as a test of rotating a reel (variable display device) by operating a start lever, a test of left reel stop operation, a center reel stop operation, and a right reel stop operation, The test for displaying various screens on the display 510, and the overall test (test game) shown in FIG. 9 are possible. In the trial hit mode, it is possible to actually play a game by operating all the functions of the S units. FIG. 11 is similarly applied to the case of S units.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 106 shows a modified example of the card unit 3 shown in FIG.

  The card unit 3 is incorporated at a position below the game area 27 as indicated by a broken line. A player can insert a card from a card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and a player can insert a bill from a bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the indicator 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the indicator 54 of the gaming machine so that the player can visually recognize it. In the figure, 320 is an IR light receiving unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a call button.

  The modified example of the card unit shown in FIG. 106 is one that is incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIG. The slot machine 2S shown in 105 may be used.

  (2) Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 7, 25, and 105 will be described. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data on the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. Here, differences from FIGS. 7, 25, and 105 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 7, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the P base 2. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 107, the hall management computer 1 The game history data is cleared on the basis of a clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. Clearing of the game history data needs to be performed for each gaming machine installed in the game hall before the game hall starts business. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by simultaneous delivery of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3 instead of the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine.

  When a hall attendant operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 reaches a predetermined time before the game hall opening time, the hall management computer 1 A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the memory in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the action of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P table 2 by the operation of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the clear command signal deletes the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the action of the clear processing unit, and the P machine game history data. Of the storage data for 10 days in the storage unit, the oldest storage data is erased, and the remaining 9 days of storage data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 107, after the player leaves the seat, the identity of the player who has left the seat and the player who will play the next game is determined on the CU3 side. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who has left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play again in the P table 2 that has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P unit 2, while when it is determined that they do not match The difference command is sent.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the same / difference command receives the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit in the current player game history data storage unit if they are the same command. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a difference command is received, control is performed to erase backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 107, and is a diagram showing storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. The same control as that in FIG. 106 is performed, and the difference is that S units are used instead of P units. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted. FIG. 107 and FIG. 108 are similar to FIGS. 7 and 105 described above, and the identity of the player is confirmed only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card, and the current player game history is confirmed. Store it in the data and take over the game history and aggregate it.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing control of processing at the time of insertion in the modification shown in FIGS. 107 and 108. The control shown in FIG. 109 is obtained by changing a part of the control shown in FIG. 25. The same control steps are given the same step numbers, and differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 109, the solid line arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-point difference line arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 109, each step of S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21 is executed by the CU, and P22 is executed by S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, the control advances to S20, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether or not they match. Next, in S21, control based on the determination result is transmitted to the P units. Specifically, in the case of a determination result that matches, the same command is transmitted to the P units in the case of a determination result that does not match.

  In the P machines, whether or not the transmitted command is a coincidence command is determined in S22, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (on the condition that they coincide with each other). Control is returned to the current player game history data storage unit) and the update of game history data is resumed (S12).

  Note that in the modification shown in FIG. 109, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 25 is not executed.

  In this modified example, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is used as a gaming machine (P machine 2 or S May be transmitted to the stand 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S) that has received the game history data a stores the received game history data a in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) and takes over the game history data a. To add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is unnecessary in the gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S).

(3) The above-described embodiment discloses an invention having the following configuration.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 799) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 16) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
An abnormality notification control means (CPU of the main control board 16, I / O port) for performing control for notifying the abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Connected to the gaming device so as to be communicable (connected by a connector),
Including an abnormality determination means (authentication sequence of FIG. 15) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
When the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means, an abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred is output to the gaming device (an abnormality in the main control board 16 is detected). The payout control unit 17 includes a P-unit communication control unit 81 and an S-unit communication control unit (not shown) to notify the CU communication control unit 80).
The gaming device performs control for notifying an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, when the error occurs during the control of the gaming machine, the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function for notifying the abnormality is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P unit communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use the information as it is in the P unit or Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) The authentication sequence and business message sequence in FIGS. 14 to 22 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80. However, the control of the authentication sequence and business message sequence in FIGS. The payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 may be used. Alternatively, the payout control unit and the S-unit communication control unit of the slot machine 2S may be used. It may be performed in other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.).

  Further, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 22 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a gaming machine computer, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 22 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 17 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, CU SID). ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (7) In the above embodiment, the number of game balls is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of game balls is displayed on the display 54 on the P platform side. Yes. When the number of game balls is displayed by a display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P platform side. When display control is performed on the P platform side, the number of game balls managed by the CU is displayed on the game ball number display section by receiving information on the number of game balls to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible to do. In addition, when display control is performed on the P platform side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of game balls having a high decorative (rendering) value. When display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in the P platform itself, It is good also as what controls display of a number.

  (8) In FIG. 34, a 10-second weight is provided on the P platform side for the floating ball processing waiting time. Instead, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the out ball It is also possible to determine that the number of winning balls = 0 or the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch = 0 to determine that the processing of the floating balls has ended. Good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, in the P units that received the prohibition request command, the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 is stopped to stop hitting the hitting ball, and the variable display device that is changing is stopped or the start winning memory is stored. In the above description, the variable display device based on the above is not stopped until the change, but instead, the change of the variable display device may be stopped.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is subtracted by a wagon service or the like, as described with reference to FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of game balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of balls requested for subtraction (for example, more than 30 balls), the CU does not wait for a response from the P unit. The game ball may be subtracted by the side alone, and then an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the P units.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a command is sent from the CU to the P machine and the P machine responds to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is sent from the P machine to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the P units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and S. Transmit from the stand communication control unit to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit, and the response (operation response) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication. The control unit transmits to the payout control unit 17.

  In this case, the payout control unit 17 executes command retransmission (not shown). That is, the payout control unit 17 sends a command to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit when the response cannot be received from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit for 1 second after the command transmission. resend. Further, the payout control unit 17 also executes the transmission of the communication state request and the communication state confirmation shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b). In other words, the payout control unit 17 transmits an operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit and then transmits a communication state request, and is returned from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit. The communication state is confirmed based on the incoming communication state response. When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the P platform at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms). Instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the P units to the other.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the P platform to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the P units returning a rejection ON operation response, an operation response including addition / subtraction ball numbers and game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. On the side, it is possible to determine whether the returned data (the number of added / subtracted balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when a power interruption at the CU or a communication interruption between the CU and the P base is detected, the ball hitting is stopped on the P base side and the play is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the game can be continued without stopping hitting on the P platform side. In that case, the P subtraction data and cumulative number of starting and subtracting balls generated along with the game that was continued from the time when the communication interruption occurred until the abnormality was recovered and started up are stored on the P platform side. In addition, at the time of activation, the data and game ball data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P platform determines that the communication is disconnected by a predetermined process. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the pachinko machine 2. As described above, the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are connected by a signal line. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from the card unit 3 is input to the pachinko machine 2 side. A connection detection signal line is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are composed of the same cable, and the cable is disconnected or the connector is disconnected, and further the power supply of the card unit 3 is disconnected. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when this occurs, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connector, or the power supply of the card unit 3 has been cut off due to the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 23, when the P platform receives a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, the P platform is programmed so that the correction request cannot be rejected by the P platform. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot be corrected such as a game ball has occurred in the P units even though a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the P unit is checked, and the P unit side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like has been corrected correctly, and if it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  That is, the CU determines in advance when it is determined that the game machine (for example, P units) cannot still add game balls or the like even after receiving the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(17) On the P platform side, the number of additional balls may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the P platform side as counters for counting the number of balls to be added. First, the number of balls to be added is counted by the counter A. When it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additional balls is counted by the counter B. If it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0. Thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtraction balls on the P platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the number of winnings at the starting port 1 and the number of winnings at the starting port 2.

  (18) The P platform does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU, but sends one information after adding / subtracting the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU. Also good. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (19) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The P units may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the P platform may transmit the ball related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the ball related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of an additional ball, it may be configured to transmit the additional ball number to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined number of additional balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball count, are provided on the P platform side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used that increments according to an increase in game balls (such as winnings) and subtracts due to a decrease in game balls (such as bullet firing). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

(21) This embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the gaming machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. In order to cancel the point subtraction instruction by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When the command is received, whether the score has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of the score, or if the score is not subtracted due to lack of the score, The score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the score storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P stand may be connected so as to be communicable by radio instead of wired connection.
(24) By providing the function of the payout control unit 17 in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 may not be provided in the pachinko machine 2.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control for stopping the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can specify and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout controller 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thereby, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls designated in advance.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, an effect unit (display effect control unit 292) is provided on the pachinko machine 2 side and various displays are made by the display unit 54. A non-pachinko machine 2 may be used. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (27) Instead of manually clearing the RAM by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 7, a clock function may be provided so that a RAM clear signal is automatically output at the game hall business start time. As described above, the game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal.

  (28) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process of the number of game history balls such as the number of symbol determinations 1, 2, the start ports 1-3, the big winning ports 1, 2, the winning ports 1-4, etc., Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P machines, the game history data is basically based on the game history data held by the P machine regardless of the match or mismatch. The CU side game history data may be controlled to be updated. However, the data of the total number of game balls, the total of added balls, and the total of subtracted balls can be matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (29) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the non-business mode is performed by a remote control operation by a game shop clerk, but instead of or in addition to this, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a game hall Control may be performed to shift to the non-business mode by inserting a test card by a store clerk into the CU. Such a transition to the non-business mode can be made to transition to the non-business mode by a remote control operation or the like while waiting for a customer (even during certain changes). And as a non-business mode, you may provide two types, the 1st non-business mode used as a non-business event in a game hall, and the 2nd non-business mode for confirmation after nail adjustment.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more game balls (or points) in the non-business mode, a game ball addition command (or points addition command) is sent from the CU side to P units (or S units). The game balls can be added by adding the game balls (or adding the number of points), but without sending the game ball addition command (or the number of points added command) from the CU side, P units (or S units) The game may be controlled so that the game can be continued even if the game balls (or the number of points) run out.

(30) The above-mentioned C-ID is composed of fixed code data that does not change. Instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time. An ID code may be used. When the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player is based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. You may comprise so that can be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and the C-ID is encrypted with the T in the card E _T (C-ID), and the E _T (C-ID) And T are output as a pair. The CU decodes the E _T (C-ID) with T and extracts the C-ID by D _T (E _T (C-ID)).

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, a player is specified based on the C-ID and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing a game. The biometric information reading means for reading the biometric information such as the fingerprint or vein of the player is provided on the CU or P base, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means. Biometric authentication may be employed.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the backup data storage unit when the card is returned. Instead, the current player game history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player game history data storage unit when the card is returned. You may control as follows. In this case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, the C-ID matching determination is performed on the P platform side. However, the matching determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the P stand 2 is transmitted to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received the C-ID. , And the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the P platform is determined. When the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, it transmits a clear command to the P unit 2. In the P base 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is deleted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit for the P unit 2 Command information for taking over the game history data and adding and updating new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command information may be code data such as takeover command information or the like, but the backup game history data for taking over, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the P unit 2 is stored on the CU side. In addition, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P unit 2 as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in the P units is not necessary.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, 58, 59, 62, 63, and 66, C-ID identity determination is performed on the CU side. Although shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P platform side. In other words, a gaming machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points and has a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that launches game media into the game area and adds points using the game value owned by the player. A game machine in which points are added according to the occurrence of
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player performing a game;
When communication is started by connecting to the gaming device, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is the same as the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means for determining whether or not a player is identified,
A gaming machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control unit that performs control to transmit a determination result by the identical determination unit from the communication unit to the gaming device.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the game history data is re-totaled in the non-business mode by touching the operation button icon such as the re-total button displayed on the display 312. However, instead of or in addition to this, it may be controlled to re-aggregate the game history data in the non-business mode by detecting the opening of the glass door.

  (36) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine type game machine is a player-owned valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or the like specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium (card). A gaming machine that has a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables the number of stored balls) to be used for gaming, and that launches gaming media into the gaming area ( Pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, the game medium is launched into the game area, and the game value owned by the player is increased. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that uses and adds points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned valuable value prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls specified by recording information received on a recording medium (card). Including a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and a variable display device that can change the display state. The game can be started by setting, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, so that one game is completed, and the derived display result is a predetermined specific display result. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can sometimes win a prize.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine is capable of playing with points and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the player's own gaming value. (S-unit communication control unit) and a variable display device whose display state can be changed, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. A game in which one game is completed by being displayed, and a winning can be generated when the derived display result becomes a predetermined display result, and a score is added in accordance with the winning. Machine (slot machine 2S).

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 104, the number of game balls and points stored by the CU and the number of game balls and points sent from the gaming machine are determined. The CU determines whether or not they match, and if they do not match, a correction command is sent to match the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side with the number of game balls and points on the CU side. C-ID matching / mismatching may be further added as a determination criterion. For example, even if the number of game balls or points stored by the CU does not match the number of game balls or points sent from the gaming machine, it will not send a correction command by itself, and from the gaming machine When the CU determines that the transmitted C-ID does not match the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality such as noise that causes C-ID data to be distorted occurs, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side to correct values. Can do.

  Further, when the CU determines that the C-ID transmitted from the gaming machine matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. In this way, if there is an abnormality that the number of game balls or points on the gaming machine side is out of order when the player is not changing, a correction command is sent to the number of game balls or points on the game machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (38) In the embodiment described above, the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 deletes the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days in the P game history data storage unit, and the remaining 9 days. One minute of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the old day one by one. As a condition for executing the shift control of this P game history data, it is a time zone before the opening of the game hall. It may be added. That is, the shift control of the P game history data is executed on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the game hall is opened.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, the mutual authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition, the LSI 799 of the gaming machine and the main control boards 16, 116 are used. Between the payout control units 17 and 117 and the P-unit communication control units 81 and 82.

  (40) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3, but instead or in addition to the CU 3, A process of clearing the game history data described above may be performed by providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch. Further, the game history data may be cleared by a remote control operation. Specifically, when a clerk at the game hall performs a clear operation by pointing the remote control at the IR light receiving unit 320 of the CU3, the IR light receiving unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared ray) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (41) In the above embodiment, the slot machine that has no need to use a physical game medium such as a medal in the game has been described as an example of the slot machine of the point system. When such a slot machine is employed, a game medium is not required, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a game medium transport path or a game medium reservoir in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be reduced in size or cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine that adopts a scoring system and updates the scoring in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or game ball in a predetermined direction is adopted. It is also possible to do.

  For example, a circulation path is provided for enclosing a large number of game media in the slot machine and circulating the enclosed game media in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / input part which can discharge | emit / input game media as needed in the predetermined location of the circulation path.

  When the point addition condition is satisfied, the slot machine adds the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be added from the plurality of game media in the circulation path to the second from the predetermined first location in the circulation path. While moving to a location, the stored score is added and updated, and a response command for adding the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored number of points.

  Further, when the score subtraction condition is satisfied, the slot machine, from among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, the number of game media corresponding to the number of score points to be subtracted from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored score is subtracted and updated, and a response command for subtracting the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored number of points.

  Even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first location to the second location as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  Also, the game medium moving between the first location and the second location can be seen through in order for the player to recognize that the points have been updated in response to the movement of the game media. It is desirable to provide the see-through part at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Further, if a plurality of movement paths for moving the game medium are provided between the first place and the second place, the possession to be updated when the addition condition or the subtraction condition is satisfied once. Game media corresponding to the number of points updated when the number of points updated is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on a lending command is large, or when the number of bets is a MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation such that the movement of the game medium continues in spite of the end of the update display of the points.

  Further, if the first place and the second place are arranged so that the upper part and the lower part in the vertical direction are in a relationship, the game medium is naturally moved from the first place to the second place by its own weight. It can be dropped, and the moving mechanism of the game medium can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is allowed to flow from the first location to the first location in both addition and subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be allowed to flow from the first location to the first location only in one of the addition and subtraction update of the score. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a flow-down path for addition update of the holding point and a flow-down path for update of the subtraction of the holding point separately, and provide a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition, respectively. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the game medium, the game medium can be circulated more smoothly than when a medal is used because the game medium is spherical. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is normally used in a game store. In this case, for example, if the pachinko ball 5 balls corresponds to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of the score = 1), when the score is updated, the updated score 5 Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first location and the second location. A pachinko ball visually recognized through a see-through window provided between the first location and the second location is a “show ball” exclusively used to indicate to the player that the points have been updated. Will function as.

  (42) In the embodiment described above, the launcher (not shown) uses a motor as a drive source, but instead, a solenoid may be used as a drive source. In this case, the origin position sensor may detect the plunger position when the solenoid is in a non-excited state, and the dispensing control unit 17 may determine the various errors described above based on the detection output of the origin sensor. Good.

  (43) By operating a ball removal switch provided on a relay board or the like, the pachinko ball 2 is loaded by driving the conveyance motor when the pachinko machine 2 is installed, or the ball of the enclosed ball is driven by driving the ball removal motor. It may be removed. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the IR light receiving unit 320 of the card unit 3 receives infrared rays emitted by operating a remote control that is held by an attendant of the game hall, so that the pachinko machine 2 from the card unit 3 is received. When a predetermined command is transmitted to the pachinko machine 2, the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 loads the pachinko ball when the pachinko machine 2 is installed and encloses the pachinko machine by driving the ball removal motor. The ball may be removed.

  (44) In the above-described embodiment, the game information (base value, etc.) is monitored based on the security-related information on both the CU side and the P base side. The abnormality was determined based on the same criteria (threshold value, etc.). However, the determination is not limited to the same determination criterion, and abnormality determination may be performed based on different determination criteria (threshold value or the like) on the CU side and the P base side. For example, on the P platform side, abnormality determination is made based on a judgment standard (threshold value, etc.) incorporated in a game machine program by default (stored as a fixed value in a ROM or the like), and on the CU side, nail adjustment or the like is performed. An abnormality is determined based on a judgment criterion (threshold value, etc.) that varies with consideration. On the contrary, on the CU side, an abnormality is determined based on a judgment standard (threshold value, etc.) incorporated in the CU program by default (stored as a fixed value in a ROM or the like), and on the P base side, nail adjustment, etc. An abnormality determination may be made based on a determination criterion (threshold value or the like) that varies in consideration of the above.

  Furthermore, the abnormality determination target based on the same or different determination criteria (threshold value or the like) may be different between the CU side and the P platform side. For example, the CU side discriminates game information abnormalities throughout the entire game, the P platform side discriminates some game information abnormalities, such as the number of winning prizes, etc. Abnormal determination (for example, abnormality determination of total game information from the time of power-on to the present time), etc., while the P platform side makes short-term abnormality determination (for example, abnormality determination of game information at intervals of 10 minutes) It may be that which performs. On the contrary, the P table side determines abnormality of game information throughout the entire game, and the CU side determines some game information abnormality such as the number of winnings in a big hit, In the case of making a long-term abnormality determination, the CU side makes a short-term abnormality determination, and the P-base side makes a long-term abnormality determination (for example, abnormality determination of total game information from the time of power-on to the present time, etc.) On the other hand, on the CU side, short-term abnormality determination (for example, abnormality determination of game information at intervals of 10 minutes) may be performed.

  (45) In the above embodiment, the security related information is set in cooperation with the upper server 801, the CU3, and the gaming machine (see FIGS. 98 to 100), but the upper server 801 and the CU3 are set. , CU3 and gaming machine may be set separately. When setting the upper server 801, the CU3, and the gaming machine in conjunction with each other, if communication delay occurs between any of the three parties, it is possible to send communications at other locations. This results in inconvenience that it takes too much time for setting as a whole. However, when settings are made separately for the upper server 801 and the CU3, and the CU3 and the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the communication delay spreads to other locations.

  (46) In the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, when a game is played with a card having a prepaid balance of 1000 and a number of balls (game balls) of 50, all the numbers of balls (game balls) The number of withdrawals 125 from the prepaid balance is added to 50, and all of them (175 balls) can be used for games. However, instead, CU3 stores all or 50 (for example, 30) of the number of balls as valuable value that cannot be used for games, and the above-mentioned number of withdrawals 125 from the prepaid balance or the above-mentioned number of balls The remaining portion (for example, 20) excluding the portion can be used for the game, and when the game is ended, the number of game balls (for example, 500) at the time of the operation is held by operating the counting buttons provided on the CU 3 and the P stand 2. By adding the total number of balls to 50 or a part of the number of balls (for example, 30) to obtain the total number of balls, and operating the return button 322, the added total number of points is written on the card (or associated with the card). The card may be ejected).

  (47) In the present embodiment, a game prohibition request is transmitted from the CU side to the gaming machine. However, instead of this, the game machine may determine that the number of game balls = 0, in which case the game machine voluntarily enters a game prohibition state and notifies the CU of the result. In this embodiment, the game prohibition request and clear request are managed on the CU side and transmitted from the CU to the gaming machine. Conversely, these managements are performed on the gaming machine side. The game machine may take the initiative to determine whether or not to clear, and notify the CU of the result. In the present embodiment, the management of points is performed on the CU side, but the management of points may be performed on the gaming machine side. For example, the gaming machine constantly updates the various types of information shown in FIG. 6 (including the number of game balls (points)) during the game, and collectively sends the information to the CU when the game ends. May record the information on the number of game balls in such a way that the card can be specified, and the card may be discharged.

  (48) Note that the P ball side floating ball processing waiting time described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 may be different from the CU side floating ball processing waiting time. For example, it is conceivable that the floating ball processing waiting time for P units is 15 seconds, while the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side is longer than that (for example, 20 seconds).

  In addition, when the counting of the floating ball processing waiting time has timed out before receiving the game completion ON from the P platform, the CU is notified (error notification) with a display or other lamps to that effect. (Ii) Ignore the possibility of floating balls and forcibly determine the game result with the current number of game balls and perform the process of discharging the card, (iii) Do not perform the process of discharging the card, Any one of the processes may be performed. The above (i) and (ii) or (iii) may be used in combination. Further, regarding (ii), although the card is ejected, a process different from when the game completion ON is received may be performed. The different processing may be any processing as long as it can identify that the regular processing has not been executed, in addition to the notification of (i) above. The data indicating that the regular processing has not been executed is directly recorded on the player's card (or recorded on the management computer in association with the card ID, not directly on the card). Such a process may also be used. Furthermore, the processing may be such that data indicating that the regular processing has not been executed is directly recorded on the card and is stored in association with the card ID by the management computer.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine that can be played with points, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and a player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicably connected (connector and connection wiring),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (payout control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change,
The gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball counter reaches 0, the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped),
The gaming device, when a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, holds the points stored in the main holding point storage means as the points at the end of the game. Point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 31) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Including instruction information transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception to the current reception Information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 6, FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the score (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 6). , FIG. 29),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 6; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Sending correction information (communication start request including game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to the point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of communication start request including game ball correction ON and number of game balls to P units),
The gaming machine corrects the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means based on the correction information (payout control unit 17; game ball number ON and game ball number ON) Compensation according to

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at intervals shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 17, FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information is not transmitted in time for determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a deviation between the two, a determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-8) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction in FIGS. 31 to 35 (with prohibition request)),
When the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibiting means (the payout control unit 17 stops driving the hitting ball launching motor 18, 33-35 "game prohibition").

  According to such a configuration, the prohibition of gaming by the gaming machine can be controlled on the gaming device side.

(1-9) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to an initial value to the gaming machine (FIG. 31, 65 (operation instruction (with clear request)),
In the gaming machine, the sub-point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the initial value is received. It includes a score initializing means (FIG. 31 and FIG. 65 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) for initializing the score value.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the gaming machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-10) A player is provided with a connection portion (connector) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game with a score is possible and a score is added according to the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using the value for gaming (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving, from the gaming machine, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  (1-11) When a signal requesting the end of a game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 31) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-12) When a score updated on the gaming machine side is received from the gaming machine in response to the use in a game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored points (FIG. 6; determining match of the number of game balls),
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for transmission to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-14) The gaming machine sequentially transmits information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval shorter than a game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) in the gaming machine. Send to
The score update unit sequentially updates the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information sequentially received (main control unit 323, FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, so that the gaming measure has a detailed reflection of the change in the points on the gaming machine side. Point management is possible.

(A1) The present invention has a first control means (LSI 799 having a payout control unit 17) and a second control means (main control board 16), and a game machine (pachinko machine 2, Slot machine 2S) and a gaming device that is communicably connected to the gaming machine, and that allows a player to play a game using the valuable value (balance, savings, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.) owned by the player A gaming system comprising (card unit 3),
The first control means stores first identification information (payout chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIGS. 6 and 104),
The second control means stores second identification information (main chip ID) for identifying the second control means (FIGS. 6 and 104) and responds to a request from the first control means. The second identification information stored in the memory is transmitted to the first control means (FIG. 78; main chip ID, chip manufacturer code, gaming machine manufacturer code, gaming machine product code is transmitted as a device information response),
The first control means transmits the stored first identification information and the transmitted second identification information to the gaming device (FIGS. 16 and 78; received information and payout chip ID). To the card unit),
The gaming device includes inquiry means (FIG. 16; inquires device information (chip ID, etc.) from an upper server) for inquiring the authenticity of the transmitted first identification information and second identification information to an upper device. .

  According to such a configuration, the authenticity between the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the second identification information for identifying the second control means is determined by the inquiry means provided in the gaming device. Since the host device is inquired, both the first control means and the second control means in the gaming machine can be monitored for illegal acts. Moreover, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device, and the second identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the first identification information for the game The function of transmitting to the device can be shared with the transmission of the second identification information to the gaming device.

  (A2) In the gaming system according to (a1), the gaming device stops communication with the gaming machine (FIG. 16; when the gaming device is inappropriate as a result of the inquiry by the inquiry unit). The subsequent communication is stopped at the time of NG).

  According to such a configuration, the communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is stopped when the authenticity of the first identification information and the second identification information is inaccurate as a result of inquiring the higher-level device. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that communication continues normally even though there is a possibility that fraud has been made in at least one of the first control means and the second control means.

(A3) In the gaming system according to (a1) or (a2), the gaming machine includes:
A game can be performed with points (number of game balls), and points are added according to the occurrence of winning (addition ball number counter in FIG. 6, addition number counter in FIG. 104, FIG. 29; game balls in accordance with winning) 3 is added to the number 1010),
Specific means (addition ball count counter and subtraction ball count counter in FIG. 6, addition count counter in FIG. 104) for specifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition ball count, subtraction ball count) in accordance with use in the game and occurrence of winning And subtraction counter)
Information transmitting means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device. ,
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(A4) In the gaming system according to (a3), the first control means includes the specifying means and the information transmitting means. The S controller 2S LSI includes an addition counter, a subtraction counter, and an S communication controller).
The second control means is game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the specifying means for specifying the amount of change of the point according to the use in the game and the occurrence of the winning, and the information transmitting means for transmitting the update information that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device Both of the first control means including the above and the game control means for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine can be monitored for fraud.

(A5) Another aspect of the present invention includes a first control means (LSI 799 having a payout control unit 17) and a second control means (main control board 16), and a game value (balance, It has a connection part (connector 20) for connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using accumulated balls, the number of game balls, cash, etc.), and can play games with points. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize,
The first control means stores first identification information (payout chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIGS. 6 and 104),
The second control means stores second identification information (main chip ID) for identifying the second control means (FIGS. 6 and 104) and responds to a request from the first control means. The second identification information stored in the memory is transmitted to the first control means (FIG. 78; main chip ID, chip manufacturer code, gaming machine manufacturer code, gaming machine product code is transmitted as a device information response),
The first control means inquires the upper device about the authenticity of the first identification information and the second identification information (FIG. 16; inquires device information (chip ID, etc.) to the upper server). The stored first identification information and the transmitted second identification information are transmitted (FIGS. 16 and 78; the received information and the payout chip ID are notified to the card unit).

  According to such a configuration, since the authenticity of the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the second identification information for identifying the second control means is inquired by the gaming device to the host device. In addition, it is possible to monitor fraudulent behaviors of both the first control means and the second control means in the gaming machine. Moreover, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device, and the second identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the first identification information for the game The function of transmitting to the device can be shared with the transmission of the second identification information to the gaming device.

(B1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player and the gaming machine so as to be communicable, and the player's valuable value (balance, accumulated ball, game ball) A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a number, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (stores the card ID and type in FIG. 24, S3 in FIG. 25);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (the card ID and type of FIG. Notification, S3) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (the received card ID and type in FIG. 24 are stored in the payout control unit, S8 in FIG. 25);
When the game ends, transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device (received from the CU when the card is inserted in FIG. C-ID and type)
In the gaming apparatus, whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means. The same determination means (determination of coincidence between the stored C-ID and the received C-ID in FIG. 31) is included.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device can identify the same player based on the player identification information transmitted from the gaming machine when the game is finished and the player identification information stored at the start of the game. It can be determined whether or not.

(B2) In the gaming system of (b1) above, the gaming machine is
First control means (payout control unit 17) including the storage means and the transmission control means;
Second control means (display effects) for receiving the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means via the first control means and storing the received player identification information. Control board 53),
The first control means deletes the player specifying information stored in the storage means after transmitting the player specifying information under the control of the transmission control means (the payout control unit in FIG. 31 is OFF during the card return process). Clear the card ID and type that was backed up, clear the card ID and type in FIG. 94),
The second control means continues to store and hold the player specifying information even after the player specifying information is erased by the first control means ([Note] even if the card shown in FIG. 94 is returned). The card ID and type backed up by the display effect control board when the card is inserted are not erased).

  According to such a configuration, after the transmission control means transmits the player specifying information to the gaming device when the game is ended, the storage of the player specifying information in the first control means is erased or the second control is performed. In the means, since the player specifying information is continuously stored even after the memory of the player specifying information is erased in the first control means, for example, a game is started after the player who has finished the game. It becomes possible to perform determination control using player specifying information after the end of the game, such as determining the identity with the player.

(B3) In the gaming system of (b2), the gaming machine further includes third control means (main control board 16),
The first control means stores first identification information (payout chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIGS. 6 and 104),
The third control means stores third identification information (main chip ID or the like) for identifying the third control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104), and identification information from the first control means. The third identification information stored in response to the request (device information request in FIG. 78) is transmitted to the first control means (main chip ID, chip manufacturer code, gaming machine manufacturer code, gaming machine in FIG. 78). Send the product code as an equipment report response),
The first control means transmits the stored first identification information and the transmitted third identification information to the gaming device (the received information and the payout chip ID of FIG. 78 are used as a card unit). Notification)
The gaming device includes inquiry means for inquiring the higher device about the authenticity of the transmitted first identification information and third identification information (inquiry of device information (chip ID) to the upper server in FIG. 16).

  According to such a configuration, the authenticity between the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the third identification information for identifying the third control means is determined by the inquiry means provided in the gaming device. Since the host device is inquired, both the first control means and the second control means in the gaming machine can be monitored for illegal acts. In addition, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device and the third identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the first identification information for the game The function of transmitting to the device can be shared with the transmission of the third identification information to the gaming device.

  (B4) In the gaming system of (b3) above, when the gaming device is inappropriate as a result of the inquiry by the inquiry means, the communication stopping means (in FIG. 16) stops communication with the gaming machine. Device information (chip ID) is inquired of the host server, and subsequent communication is stopped during NG).

  According to such a configuration, when the authenticity of the first identification information and the third identification information is inquired to the higher-level device and is inappropriate, the communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is stopped. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that communication continues as usual even though there is a possibility that fraud has been made in at least one of the first control means and the third control means.

(B5) In the gaming system according to any one of (b1) to (b4), the gaming machine includes:
A game can be performed with points (number of game balls), and points are added according to the occurrence of winning (addition ball number counter in FIG. 6, addition number counter in FIG. 104, FIG. 29; game balls in accordance with winning) 3 is added to the number 1010),
Specific means (addition ball count counter and subtraction ball count counter in FIG. 6, addition count counter in FIG. 104) for specifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition ball count, subtraction ball count) in accordance with use in the game and occurrence of winning And subtraction counter)
Information transmitting means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device. ,
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(B6) In the gaming system of (b5), the gaming machine includes display means (display 54) for displaying information,
The first control means (LSI 799 having the payout control unit 17) including the storage means and the transmission control means is the identification means and the information transmission means (the LSI 799 of the P unit 2 is an addition ball counter and subtraction ball count). A counter and P unit communication control unit 81, and the S unit 2S LSI includes an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, and an S unit communication control unit),
Second control means (main control board) for receiving the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means via the first control means and storing the received player identification information Reference numeral 16) denotes display control means (display effect control board 53) for controlling the display means.

  According to such a configuration, not only the first control means but also the display control means stores the player specifying information, so that it is possible to perform display control using the player specifying information.

(B7) Another aspect of the present invention includes a connection portion (connector 380) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by the player, A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a valuable value (balance, savings, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.),
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (stores the card ID and type in FIG. 24, S3 in FIG. 25);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (the card ID and type of FIG. And S3) in FIG.
Stored in the player specifying information storage means and the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming machine storing the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means when the game is ended. The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified based on the specified player specifying information (matching determination between the stored C-ID and the received C-ID in FIG. 31); including.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device can identify the same player based on the player identification information transmitted from the gaming machine when the game is finished and the player identification information stored at the start of the game. It can be determined whether or not.

(B8) In the gaming apparatus of (b7) above, the valuable value owned by the player includes a point (the number of game balls),
The gaming device further includes
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving, from the gaming machine, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(C1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a communicable value connected to the gaming machine (the balance, accumulated balls, game balls) A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a number, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (the card ID and type of FIG. Notification, S3) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (the payout control unit stores the received card ID and type in FIG. 24, S8 in FIG. 25). When,
Based on the fact that the player identification information has been transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the player identification information transmitted and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means And the same determination means (S95 in FIG. 25) for performing the same determination process for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the information.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. In the gaming machine, the player specifying information is stored, and then, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming device, the transmitted player Since the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the specific information and the already stored player specifying information, the identity of the previous player and the current player is the same It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

(C2) In the gaming system of (c1) above, the gaming machine includes:
First control means (payout control unit 17) for receiving the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means;
Including the player specifying information storage means, receiving the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means via the first control means, and receiving the received player specifying information. Second control means (display effect control board 53) to be stored in the player specifying information storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified using the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means of the second control means. Thus, the identity of the previous player and the current player can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player despite being different players can be prevented.

(C3) In the gaming system of (c2), the gaming machine further includes third control means (main control board 16),
The first control means stores first identification information (payout chip ID) for identifying the first control means (FIGS. 6 and 104),
The third control means stores third identification information (main chip ID or the like) for identifying the third control means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104), and identification information from the first control means. The third identification information stored in response to the request (device information request in FIG. 78) is transmitted to the first control means (main chip ID, chip manufacturer code, gaming machine manufacturer code, gaming machine in FIG. 78). Send the product code as an equipment report response),
The first control means transmits the stored first identification information and the transmitted third identification information to the gaming device (the received information and the payout chip ID of FIG. 78 are used as a card unit). Notification)
The gaming device includes inquiry means for inquiring the higher device about the authenticity of the transmitted first identification information and third identification information (inquiry of device information (chip ID) to the upper server in FIG. 16).

  According to such a configuration, the authenticity between the first identification information for identifying the first control means and the third identification information for identifying the third control means is determined by the inquiry means provided in the gaming device. In order to make an inquiry to the host device, both the first control means and the third control means in the gaming machine can be monitored for fraud. In addition, since the first identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the gaming device and the third identification information is also transmitted to the gaming device via the first control means, the first identification information for the game The function of transmitting to the device can be shared with the transmission of the third identification information to the gaming device.

  (C4) In the gaming system of (c3), when the gaming device is inappropriate as a result of the inquiry by the inquiry means, the communication stopping means (in FIG. 16) stops communication with the gaming machine. Device information (chip ID) is inquired of the host server, and subsequent communication is stopped during NG).

  According to such a configuration, when the authenticity of the first identification information and the third identification information is inquired to the higher-level device and is inappropriate, the communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is stopped. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that communication continues as usual even though there is a possibility that fraud has been made in at least one of the first control means and the third control means.

(C5) In the gaming system according to any one of (c1) to (c4), the gaming machine includes:
A game can be performed with points (number of game balls), and points are added according to the occurrence of winning (addition ball number counter in FIG. 6, addition number counter in FIG. 104, FIG. 29; game balls in accordance with winning) 3 is added to the number 1010),
Specific means (addition ball count counter and subtraction ball count counter in FIG. 6, addition count counter in FIG. 104) for specifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition ball count, subtraction ball count) in accordance with use in the game and occurrence of winning And subtraction counter)
Information transmitting means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device. ,
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(C6) In the gaming system of (c5) above, the gaming machine includes display means (display device 54) for displaying information,
The first control means (LSI 799 having the payout control unit 17) that receives the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means includes the specifying means and the information transmitting means (P (The LSI 799 of the stand 2 includes an addition ball counter, a subtraction ball counter, and a P communication control unit 81, and the LSI of the S stand 2S includes an addition counter, a subtraction counter, and an S communication control unit) ,
Including the player specifying information storage means, receiving the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means via the first control means, and receiving the received player specifying information. The second control means (main control board 16) stored in the player specifying information storage means is display control means (display effect control board 53) for controlling the display means.

  According to such a configuration, not only the first control means but also the display control means stores the player specifying information, so that it is possible to perform display control using the player specifying information.

(C7) Another aspect of the present invention is to connect a gaming device (card unit 3) that can use a player's valuable value balance, savings, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.) for gaming. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a connecting portion (connector 20) of
Receiving means (P-unit communication control unit 81 in FIGS. 24, 25, and 5) for receiving player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game when starting a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information received by the receiving means (the received card ID and type in FIG. 24 is stored in the payout control unit, S8 in FIG. 25);
Same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information received by the receiving means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means (FIG. 25). S95).

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player who performs the game is transmitted to the gaming machine, the gaming machine stores the player specifying information, and then the player specifying information is stored. When the information is transmitted, the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the transmitted player specifying information and the already stored player specifying information. Therefore, the identity of the previous player and the current player can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player despite being different players can be prevented.

(D1) The present invention is a connection for communicably connecting to a gaming device (CU) that adds points (the number of gaming balls) using a gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player. A game machine (P units) that is capable of playing ball and ball games with points and that adds points in response to the occurrence of winnings in the winning area provided in the gaming area,
Specific means (payout control unit 17, added ball number counter, subtracted ball number counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
An undetermined ball number specifying means for identifying the number of undetermined balls for which the presence or absence of winning a prize has not been confirmed among the balls fired into the game area (the number counter in the game, FIG. 68);
Launch prohibition means (SS1, SS2, FIG. 31 in FIG. 69) for prohibiting ball launch when receiving game prohibition request information (game prohibition ON) requesting game prohibition from the gaming device;
Based on the reception of the game prohibition request information, game end information transmitting means (SS10 in FIG. 69, FIG. 31) for transmitting game end information (game completion ON) indicating the end of the game to the gaming device; Including
When the game end information transmitting means receives the game prohibition request information and is in an unconfirmed state where the unconfirmed ball exists, the game end information is transmitted when the unconfirmed ball is present The information is transmitted (NO in SS3 in FIG. 69, and then the in-game ball counter is subtracted in SS9, resulting in YES in SS3 and proceeding to SS10), while a predetermined fixed waiting period (wait, floating ball processing timer) ), When the unconfirmed state continues, the game end information is transmitted after the confirmation waiting period has elapsed (SS13, SS14, SS10 in FIG. 69),
When the unconfirmed state continues until the predetermined definite waiting period elapses, the undetermined number of balls initializing the undetermined ball number specified by the undetermined ball number identifying means after the definite waiting period has elapsed Including a converting means (SS14 in FIG. 69).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of quickly completing the game end process when the game is not performed while the indeterminate ball can be processed.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (d1),
The specifying means specifies the amount of change in the score due to the occurrence of a winning when a winning is generated by the unconfirmed ball while the firing of the ball is prohibited by the firing prohibiting means (SS6 in FIG. 69). ,
The update information transmitting means, when the change amount of the holding point is specified by the specifying means while the launching of the ball is prohibited by the launch prohibiting means, the update information that can specify the change amount of the game (S7 in FIG. 69).

  According to the above configuration, even when a winning occurs in an unconfirmed state, information that can specify the amount of change in the points based on the winning can be transmitted to the gaming device, and accurate information can be sent on the gaming device side. It becomes possible to grasp.

(D3) (d1) In the gaming machine described in (d2),
A point storage means for storing points (game ball counter in FIG. 6);
A score update means (see FIG. 6, payout control unit 17) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
The undetermined ball number initializing unit specifies the undetermined ball number specifying unit after the predetermined period even when the number of points stored in the holding point storage unit is 0 for a predetermined period. The number of unconfirmed balls is initialized (see FIG. 68).

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where it can be determined that the state of zero points has passed for a predetermined period of time and the state in which no game is being performed continues, the number of unconfirmed balls is initialized. Thus, it is possible to shift to the game completion state as quickly as possible.

(D4) In the gaming machines (d1) to (d3),
After the undetermined ball number initializing unit initializes the undetermined ball number specified by the undetermined ball number specifying unit, if a winning with the undetermined ball occurs, the winning of the game after the game ends It further includes an after-game change amount storage means for storing the change amount of the point according to the occurrence (SS11, SS12 in FIG. 69).

  According to the above configuration, even if a winning occurs after the number of unconfirmed balls has been initialized, the amount of change in the points based on the winning is stored. It becomes possible to correct the holding point of to an appropriate value.

(D5) In the gaming machines (d1) to (d4),
When the game prohibition request information is received and in the unconfirmed state, game non-completion information transmitting means (SS4 in FIG. 69) for transmitting game non-completion information (game completion OFF) indicating that the game has not been completed to the game device. )including.

  According to said structure, it can notify that it is an undecided state with respect to the apparatus for game by transmitting game incomplete information.

(D6) In the gaming machines (d3) to (d5),
After the transmission of the game end information, when the initialization request information (with clear request) is received from the gaming device, the score initializing means for initializing the score stored in the score storage means ( FIG. 31: In response to a clear request, the memory of the number of game balls is cleared).

  According to the above configuration, in order to initialize the score after waiting for the reception of the initialization request information, for example, compared to a case where the score is initialized early when the game end information is transmitted. Thus, it is possible to perform the point process according to the instruction of the gaming apparatus.

(E1) In the present invention, a game machine (P machines) in which a ball game can be performed by using a score (the number of game balls) and a score is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize in a prize area provided in the game area. A game unit (CU) that includes a connection unit for communicably connecting with a player and adds a score using a player's own gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.),
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6);
Information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving from the gaming machine update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323, FIG. 6) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information;
A game prohibition request information transmitting means (SS51 in FIG. 70) for transmitting game prohibition request information for requesting a game prohibition to the gaming machine when an operation for ending the game is detected (SS50 in FIG. 70);
After the game prohibition request information is transmitted, a predetermined waiting period (wait time, FIG. 70) taking into account the time required from when a ball is fired to the game area until the presence / absence of winning by the ball is determined. Until the elapse of the floating ball processing waiting time (SS58) of the game machine 58, waiting for reception of game end information (game completion ON) indicating the end of the game from the gaming machine, and when the game end information is received, Includes game result confirmation means (YES in SS53, SS55) for confirming the stored points as game results.

  According to such a configuration, the game end process can be quickly completed when the game machine is in a state where a game is not performed while being able to cope with the process of the indeterminate ball on the game machine side.

(E2) In the gaming apparatus according to (e1),
A recording medium receiving means (card insertion / discharge port 309) for receiving a recording medium (member card, visitor card) in which information capable of specifying a player's own gaming value (balance) is recorded;
Recording medium discharge processing means (SS55 in FIG. 70) for performing processing to discharge the recording medium when an operation for ending a game is detected,
When the game result determining means receives the game end information, the game result determining means associates the score stored in the score storage means with the received recording medium, thereby the score storage means Is determined as a game result (SS55 in FIG. 70),
The recording medium discharge processing means discharges the recording medium that is associated with the score stored in the score storage means by the game result determination means (SS55 in FIG. 70).

  According to such a configuration, the game result can be specified by the recording medium on which the information for specifying the game value owned by the player is recorded.

(E3) (e1) In the gaming device according to (e2),
The score update means stores the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information received from when the game prohibition request information is transmitted until the game end information is received. The points are updated (SS59 and SS60 in FIG. 70).

  According to such a configuration, even if a prize is generated on the gaming machine side in the unconfirmed state, the game apparatus side receives the update information based on the prize and updates the score. Information can be accurately grasped.

(E4) In the gaming apparatus according to (e1) to (e3),
Initialization request information transmitting means for transmitting initialization request information for requesting initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine to the gaming machine when the gaming end information is received (FIG. 70). SS54).

  According to such a configuration, in order to initialize the points stored on the gaming machine side by transmitting the initialization request information, the initialization management of the points stored on the gaming machine side is performed on the gaming device side. It becomes possible to do.

(F1) The present invention is capable of playing with points (number of game balls, points), a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, A gaming system that includes a gaming device (CU) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine while adding points using gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.)
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmitting means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
Based on the received mode switching command information, the gaming machine has a sales mode in which the player can play a game (a sales mode for providing a game to the player) and a non-business mode (FIG. 8 to FIG. 8). 10; Mode switching means for switching to any one of maintenance mode, test mode, and trial hit mode (FIGS. 11, 73, 80, and 96; payout control unit 17, main control board 16, display control board 53) Including
The mode switching means includes a maintenance mode (see FIG. 8) in which parameters for collecting game history data of a player in the sales mode can be set, and a normal operation by partially operating the gaming machine. Among a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode (see FIG. 9) that can be confirmed for each part, the mode is switched to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming device and changes the mode, the gaming device has a high degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching. System can be provided. Moreover, by switching to the maintenance mode, it becomes possible to set parameters when collecting game history data of the player in the sales mode, and by switching to the test mode, the gaming machine is partially operated to change the normality of the operation. It is possible to check each part.

(F2) The present invention includes a connection unit for connecting to a gaming device that adds points using game values (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player, Is a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize,
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information (mode change request) from the gaming device;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, based on the received mode switching command information, a business mode in which a player can play a game (game to the player) Mode switching means (FIG. 11, FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96; payout) for switching between the business mode for providing) and the non-business mode (FIGS. 8 to 10; maintenance mode, test mode, trial hit mode) Control unit 17, main control board 16, display control board for display 53),
The mode switching means includes a maintenance mode (see FIG. 8) in which parameters can be set when collecting game data of the player in the sales mode, and the normality of the operation by partially operating the gaming machine. Of a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode (see FIG. 9) that can be confirmed for each part, the mode is switched to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having a high degree of cooperation with the gaming apparatus with respect to mode switching in order to receive the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and change the mode. It becomes. Moreover, by switching to the maintenance mode, it becomes possible to set parameters when collecting game history data of the player in the sales mode, and by switching to the test mode, the gaming machine is partially operated to change the normality of the operation. It is possible to check each part.

(F3) In the gaming system according to (f1),
The mode switching means switches to the test mode on condition that a gaming device for test mode is connected to the gaming machine (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a normal gaming device used at the time of business operation from being erroneously switched to the test mode in a state where the gaming machine is connected to the gaming machine and a game is provided to the player.

(F4) In the gaming system according to (f1) and (f3),
A test game for confirming the collection status of game history data based on the setting parameters in the maintenance mode is possible (see FIG. 8),
The mode switching means does not switch from the maintenance mode to another mode until the result of the test game is determined (see FIG. 8; end condition).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched in a state where the result of the test game is indeterminate, and the switched previous mode is influenced by the previous indeterminate amount.

(F5) In the gaming system described in (f4),
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means (game history data storage unit in non-business mode) for storing game history data based on the test game in the maintenance mode;
Game history initialization means (see FIG. 8) for initializing the storage of the game history data storage means when the maintenance mode is switched to another mode.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history in the maintenance mode affects the game history in the previous mode switched from the maintenance mode.

(F6) In the gaming system according to (f1) (f3) (f4) (f5),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter in FIG. 6, addition counter, subtraction counter in FIG. 104) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information transmitting means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information;
The mode switching command information transmission means transmits mode switching command information for instructing switching to the maintenance mode on the condition that no score is stored in the score storage means (see FIGS. 8 and 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, since the switching command to the maintenance mode is performed on the condition that there is no score storage, when the player has a score and the player is playing, the business mode is erroneously changed from the sales mode. The inconvenience of switching to the maintenance mode can be prevented.

(F7) In the gaming system according to (f6),
The update information transmitting means does not transmit the update information to the gaming device in the non-business mode (see FIGS. 8 to 10).

  According to such a configuration, in the non-business mode, it is not necessary to manage update information on the gaming device side, so the management burden on the gaming device side can be reduced.

(F8) In the gaming system according to (f1) (f3) to (f7),
In the test mode, it is possible to individually check the operation of the game medium launching mechanism, the holding point display mechanism for displaying the holding points, and the game medium moving mechanism (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to individually check the malfunction of the gaming machine by using the test mode.

(G1) The present invention can be played with points (number of game balls, points), and a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added in accordance with the occurrence of winnings, A gaming system that includes a gaming device (CU) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine while adding points using gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.)
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmitting means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
Based on the received mode switching command information, the gaming machine has a sales mode in which the player can play a game (a sales mode for providing a game to the player) and a non-business mode (FIG. 8 to FIG. 8). 10; Mode switching means for switching to any one of maintenance mode, test mode, and trial hit mode (FIGS. 11, 73, 80, and 96; payout control unit 17, main control board 16, display control board 53) Including
The mode switching means includes a test mode (see FIG. 9) in which the gaming machine is partially operated to check the normality of the operation for each part, and a trial hit mode in which the gaming machine can be tried (See FIG. 10), the mode is switched to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming device and changes the mode, the gaming device has a high degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching. System can be provided. In addition, the gaming machine can be partially operated by switching to the test mode, and the normality of the operation can be confirmed for each part, and the test can be made by switching to the test mode.

(G2) The present invention is provided with a connection unit for communicably connecting to a gaming device that adds points using game values (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player, Is a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize,
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information (mode change request) from the gaming device;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, based on the received mode switching command information, a business mode in which a player can play a game (game to the player) Mode switching means (FIG. 11, FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96; payout) for switching between the business mode for providing) and the non-business mode (FIGS. 8 to 10; maintenance mode, test mode, trial hit mode) Control unit 17, main control board 16, display control board for display 53),
The mode switching means includes a test mode (see FIG. 9) in which the gaming machine is partially operated to check the normality of the operation for each part, and a trial hit mode in which the gaming machine can be tried (See FIG. 10), the mode is switched to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having a high degree of cooperation with the gaming apparatus with respect to mode switching in order to receive the mode switching command information from the gaming apparatus and change the mode. It becomes. In addition, the gaming machine can be partially operated by switching to the test mode, and the normality of the operation can be confirmed for each part, and the test can be made by switching to the test mode.

(G3) In the gaming system described in (g1),
The mode switching means switches to the test mode on condition that a gaming device for test mode is connected to the gaming machine (see FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a normal gaming device used at the time of business operation from being erroneously switched to the test mode in a state where the gaming machine is connected to the gaming machine and a game is provided to the player.

(G4) In the gaming system described in (g1) and (g3),
The mode switching means does not switch from the test hit mode to another mode until the game result is determined in the test hit mode (see FIG. 10; end condition).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the mode is switched in a state where the result of the test game is indeterminate, and the switched previous mode is influenced by the previous indeterminate amount.

(G5) In the gaming system described in (g4),
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means (game history data storage unit in non-business mode) for storing game history data based on trial hits in the test hit mode;
Game history initialization means (see FIG. 10) for initializing the storage of the game history data storage means when the test hit mode is switched to another mode.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history in the test hit mode affects the game history in the previous mode switched from the test hit mode.

(G6) In the gaming system described in (g1), (g3), (g4), and (g5),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter in FIG. 6, addition counter, subtraction counter in FIG. 104) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information transmitting means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information;
The mode switching command information transmission means transmits mode switching command information for instructing switching to the test hit mode on the condition that no score is stored in the score storage means (see FIGS. 8 and 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, since the switching command to the test hit mode is performed on the condition that there is no score storage, when the player has a score and the player is playing, the business mode is erroneously changed from the sales mode. The inconvenience of switching to the test hit mode can be prevented.

(G7) In the gaming system described in (g6),
The update information transmitting means does not transmit the update information to the gaming device in the non-business mode (see FIGS. 8 to 10).

  According to such a configuration, in the non-business mode, it is not necessary to manage update information on the gaming device side, so the management burden on the gaming device side can be reduced.

(H1) The present invention uses a gaming machine in which a game is played by a player, and a communicably connected to the gaming machine, and uses the player's valuable value (balance, stored balls, number of game balls, cash, etc.) A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on a gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Game machine side setting storage means (S774) for storing a first setting used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing a game is appropriate;
Gaming machine side suitability judging means (S827 to S830) for judging whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate based on the settings stored in the gaming machine side setting storage means,
The gaming device is:
Game device side setting storage means (S757) for storing a second setting used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
Game device-side suitability determination means (S807 to S810) for judging whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the settings stored in the game device-side setting storage means.

  According to such a configuration, in order to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate in the gaming machine, and to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate in the gaming device, Compared to self-determining whether or not the numerical value of game information is appropriate, the burden on the management device can be reduced, and an abnormality can be properly determined even if either a gaming machine or a gaming device is cheated Can do.

(H2) In the gaming system of (h1) above, the gaming machine sends gaming information transmitting means for transmitting gaming information to the gaming device (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls in FIGS. Addition number, subtraction number)
The game apparatus-side suitability determining means determines whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted by the game information transmitting means is appropriate (S801 to S807).

  According to such a configuration, for example, the gaming machine is not cheating at all, and the gaming information is altered from the gaming machine to the gaming device by cheating in the communication portion between the gaming machine and the gaming device. Is transmitted to the gaming machine-side suitability judging means, but the gaming device-side suitability judging means makes an abnormality judgment, and it is also possible to discriminate against fraud in the communication portion. .

  (H3) In the gaming device of (h1) or (h2), when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the gaming device-side suitability determining means (Y in S810), the gaming device is inappropriate It further includes error transmission means (S812) for transmitting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be higher-level equipment.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is transmitted from the gaming device to the host device, the gaming management device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

(I1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a communicably connected to the gaming machine, and the player's valuable value (balance, accumulated ball, game ball) A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a number, cash, etc.,
The gaming machine is
Communication means (payout control unit 17) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53) for performing display control in accordance with a command from the communication means,
The gaming apparatus transmits update value information specifying an update value of the valuable value and update factor information indicating the update factor of the valuable value to the communication means (addition request balls in FIGS. 26, 27, and 71). And the number of subtraction request balls in FIG. 28 and FIG. 72 and the CU state in FIG. 83).
The communication means updates the valuable value based on the transmitted update value information (“update the number of game balls to 175” in FIG. 26, “update the number of game balls to 125” in FIG. 27, FIG. "Update the number of game balls to 700"), the updated value and the transmitted update factor information are transmitted to the display control means (game ball total number information of FIG. 82 and CU of FIG. 83). Status and send)
The display control means updates and displays the value that has been transmitted in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determining the addition factor of the stored ball replay or prepaid consumption in FIG. 91). 97 is displayed in such a manner that both can be distinguished)
The communication means transmits the updated valuable value and the transmitted update factor information to the display control means at the timing when the updated value information is transmitted from the gaming device (addition request ball in FIG. 71). The addition request ball number received at the timing of receiving the number and the addition display bit are transmitted to the display effect control board, and the subtraction request ball number and subtraction display bit received at the timing of receiving the subtraction request ball number of FIG. (Send to display control board for display).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the update factor, and the player feels uncomfortable. Inconvenience can be prevented.

  (I2) In the gaming system of (i1) above, the display control means executes an effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated in a mode according to the transmitted update factor information (screen display in FIG. 97). In this case, the holding ball is gradually updated).

  According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(I3) In the gaming system of (i1) or (i2) above, the gaming machine can be played with points, and points are added in accordance with the occurrence of winnings (FIG. 29; number of game balls 1010). Add 3 balls to add)
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The update factor information is information indicating whether to use a balance as a player-owned game value or to use an acquired value acquired by a player as a game value owned by a player (FIG. 83; Including addition display of Bit4 included in the CU state (prepaid lending) and addition display of Bit5 (replay)).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the balance is used or the acquired value acquired by the game is used as the update factor by the update factor information.

(I4) Another aspect of the present invention is a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that makes it possible to use a player's valuable value (balance, savings, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.) for gaming. A gaming machine (a pachinko machine 2, a slot machine 2S) provided with a P-unit communication control unit 81 and an S-unit communication control unit,
Communication means (payout control unit 17) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53) for performing display control in accordance with a command from the communication means,
The communication means updates the valuable value based on the update value information specifying the update value of the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device (“Update the number of game balls to 175” in FIG. 26, FIG. 27). “Update the number of game balls to 125”, “Update the number of game balls to 700” in FIG. 28), update factors of the updated valuable value and the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device to the display control means And update factor information indicating (the game ball total number information of FIG. 82 and the CU state of FIG. 83 are transmitted),
The display control means updates and displays the value that has been transmitted in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determining the addition factor of the stored ball replay or prepaid consumption in FIG. 91). 97 is displayed in such a manner that both can be distinguished)
The communication means transmits the updated valuable value and the transmitted update factor information to the display control means at the timing when the updated value information is transmitted from the gaming device (addition request ball in FIG. 71). The addition request ball number received at the timing of receiving the number and the addition display bit are transmitted to the display effect control board, and the subtraction request ball number and subtraction display bit received at the timing of receiving the subtraction request ball number of FIG. (Send to display control board for display).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the update factor, and the player feels uncomfortable. Inconvenience can be prevented.

  (I5) In the gaming machine of (i4) above, the display control means executes an effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated in a mode according to the transmitted update factor information (in the screen display of FIG. 97). The display will be gradually updated).

  According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(I6) In the gaming machine of (i4) or (i5) above, the gaming machine can play a game with points, and the points are added according to the occurrence of a prize (FIG. 29; the number of game balls 1010) Add 3 balls)),
The valuable value includes the points (number of game balls),
The update factor information is information indicating whether to use a balance as a player-owned game value or to use an acquired value acquired by a player as a game value owned by a player (FIG. 83; Including addition display of Bit4 included in the CU state (prepaid lending) and addition display of Bit5 (replay)).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the balance is used or the acquired value acquired by the game is used as the update factor by the update factor information.

(J1) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming device (CU) that adds points (number of game balls, points) using game values (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player. A game machine (P units, S units) that has a connecting portion for allowing a game with points, and that points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize,
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state;
Predetermined gaming machine information including an amount of change in points (addition ball number, subtraction ball number, game ball number, start port 1, winning number, Holding point control means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting a symbol determination number) to the gaming device,
The game control means includes
First gaming machine information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming machine information to the holding point control means (FIG. 79; transmitting a table state inquiry response from the main control board to the payout control unit);
Arrival determining means for determining arrival of the gaming machine information to the holding point control means based on predetermined arrival confirmation information (SQN) transmitted from the holding point control means (FIG. 79; on the main control board side) Check the SQN of the stand status inquiry request (see FIG. 77),
The holding point control means includes:
Second gaming machine information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming machine information transmitted from the gaming control means to the gaming device (operation response shown in FIGS. 29, 30, 40, etc .; P units (payout control) Part 17) to CU),
Arrival confirmation information transmitting means for transmitting the arrival confirmation information to the game control means (FIG. 79; sending a table state inquiry request from the payout control unit to the main control board);
The first gaming machine information transmitting means is configured to generate new gaming machine information that has occurred since the gaming machine information was transmitted last time when the gaming machine information is determined to be unreached by the arrival determining means. The sum of the gaming machine information that has not yet reached is transmitted to the holding point control means (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase information transmission efficiency while reliably retransmitting information regarding a gaming machine that is communicably connected to a gaming device.

(J2) The gaming machine according to (j1),
The game control means includes addition number specifying means (specifying the number of prize balls shown in FIG. 75) for specifying the number of points to be added when a winning occurs.
The second gaming machine information transmitting means transmits information that can specify the addition number specified by the addition number specifying means to the gaming device as the gaming machine information (the number of prize balls is included in the number of added balls). Sent as an action response).

  According to such a structure, the information regarding the number of additions to the points can be transmitted reliably and efficiently.

(J3) The gaming machine according to (j1) (j2),
The first gaming machine information transmitting means transmits the gaming machine information to the holding point controlling means together with predetermined arrival confirmation information (SQN) (see the table status inquiry response in FIG. 79),
The holding point control means includes first arrival confirmation information updating means (see the stand status inquiry request in FIG. 79) for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information,
The arrival confirmation information transmitting means transmits the arrival confirmation information updated by the first arrival confirmation information updating means to the game control means (see the stand status inquiry request in FIG. 79).

  According to such a configuration, the arrival of gaming machine information can be confirmed based on whether or not the arrival confirmation information is updated and the update status.

(J4) The gaming machine according to (j3),
The game control means includes second arrival confirmation information updating means for updating the arrival confirmation information transmitted from the holding point control means (see the stand status inquiry response in FIG. 79),
In response to the transmission request from the holding point control means, the first gaming machine information transmitting means sets the gaming machine information together with the arrival confirmation information updated by the second arrival confirmation information updating means. To the holding point control means (see the stand status inquiry response in FIG. 79),
The holding point control means, when the arrival confirmation information transmitted together with the gaming machine information and the arrival confirmation information transmitted to the gaming control means last time have no predetermined relationship, Discard and retransmit the transmission request (see FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine information has arrived by updating the arrival confirmation information by both the holding point control means and the game control means.

(J5) The gaming machine according to (j1) to (j4),
The game control means corrects the arrival confirmation information when the arrival determination means determines that the gaming machine information has not yet reached (see FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the gaming machine information has not yet reached based on the arrival confirmation information, the arrival confirmation information is corrected. By using it, it becomes possible to confirm the arrival of gaming machine information.

(K1) The present invention allows a game with points (number of game balls, points), a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, A gaming system that includes a gaming device (CU) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine while adding points using gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.)
The gaming apparatus includes mode switching command information transmitting means (see FIG. 73) for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
A holding point control means for transmitting update information (the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that is communicably connected to the gaming device and can specify the amount of change in the holding points (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, the payout control unit 17),
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state,
The holding point control means includes:
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving the mode switching command information;
Mode switching requesting means (see FIG. 80) for requesting the game control means to switch modes when the mode switching command information receiving means is received by the mode switching command information receiving means;
The game control means includes
When mode switching is requested by the mode switching request means, it is determined whether or not a first mode switching condition (FIG. 80; not changing symbol, not hitting big, not hitting small) is satisfied. First condition determining means (see FIG. 80);
A business mode in which a player can play a game based on a request for mode switching when the first condition determining means determines that the first mode switching condition is satisfied; Mode switching means (see FIG. 80) for switching to any one of the non-business modes.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming device and changes the mode, the gaming device has a high degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching. System can be provided. In addition, since the mode is switched on the gaming machine side when the first mode switching condition is satisfied, the mode before and after the switching can be prevented from being adversely affected by the unconditional switching of the mode.

(K2) The present invention is communicably connected to a game device (CU) that adds points (number of game balls, points) using game values (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player. A game machine (P units, S units) that has a connecting portion for allowing a game with points, and that points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize,
Holding point control for transmitting update information (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls) that is connected to the gaming device via the connection unit so as to be able to identify the amount of change in holding points to the gaming device. Means (FIG. 6, FIG. 104, payout control unit 17);
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the game state,
The holding point control means includes:
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving predetermined mode switching command information from the gaming device;
Mode switching requesting means (see FIG. 80) for requesting the game control means to switch the mode when the mode switching command information receiving means is received by the mode switching command information receiving means;
The game control means includes
When mode switching is requested by the mode switching request means, it is determined whether or not a first mode switching condition (FIG. 80; not changing symbol, not hitting big, not hitting small) is satisfied. First condition determining means (see FIG. 80);
A business mode in which a player can play a game based on a request for mode switching when the first condition determining means determines that the first mode switching condition is satisfied; Mode switching means (see FIG. 80) for switching to any one of the non-business modes.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine receives the mode switching command information from the gaming device and changes the mode, the gaming device has a high degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine with respect to the mode switching. A gaming machine in the system can be provided. In addition, since the mode is switched on the gaming machine side when the first mode switching condition is satisfied, the mode before and after the switching can be prevented from being adversely affected by the unconditional switching of the mode.

(K3) In the gaming system described in (k1),
Including a variable display device capable of variably displaying multiple types of identification information (designs),
The game control means is a specific game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to a player when the display result of the variable display device is in a specific display mode (for example, 7 symbols are aligned or big bonus symbols are aligned). Control, big bonus)
The first condition determining means determines that the first mode switching condition is satisfied when the variable display device is not performing variable display (see FIG. 80).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the mode is switched during a game in which the variable display device performs variable display.

(K4) In the gaming system described in (k1),
Including a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
The game control means is a specific game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to a player when the display result of the variable display device is in a specific display mode (for example, 7 symbols are aligned or big bonus symbols are aligned). Control, big bonus)
The first condition determining means determines that the first mode switching condition is satisfied when not in the specific gaming state (see FIG. 80).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the mode is switched during the specific gaming state.

(K5) In the gaming system according to (k1) (k3) (k4),
The holding point control means, when receiving the mode switching command information, determines whether or not a predetermined second mode switching condition (0 yen 0 ball state, number of balls in game is 0) is established. Including second condition determining means (see FIG. 73);
The mode switching request means requests the game control means to switch the mode when the second condition determining means determines that the second mode switching condition is satisfied (see FIG. 73). .

  According to such a configuration, the presence / absence of the second mode switching condition is determined by the holding point control means separately from the game control means, and therefore the mode before and after the switching is adversely affected by the unconditional switching of the mode. It is possible to further prevent the effect from being exerted.

(K6) In the gaming system according to (k5),
The second condition determining means determines that the second mode switching condition is satisfied when the game result is fixed (the number of balls in game is zero) (see FIG. 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, the mode is switched when the game result is not fixed, and the game result before the switching is affected with respect to the mode after the switching. Can be prevented.

(K7) In the gaming system according to (k5) (k6),
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIG. 6, an area for storing points on the CU side in FIG. 104);
Update information receiving means (main control unit 323, receiving update information (addition ball number, subtraction ball number) that can specify the amount of change in the point according to the use in the game and the occurrence of a prize from the point control means 6 and 104),
Main point update means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information,
The mode switching command information transmitting means is provided with a condition switching command to the gaming machine on the condition that no score is stored in the main possessing point storage means (card unit side; command is transmitted only in the 0 ball state). Send the information (see FIG. 73),
The holding point control means includes:
Separately from the main possession point storage means, secondary possession point storage means for storing points (game ball counter, possession point counter, FIG. 6, FIG. 104),
Including secondary score update means (see FIGS. 6 and 104) for updating the score stored in the secondary score storage means in accordance with the use of the score for the game and the occurrence of winnings,
The second condition determination means determines that the second mode switching condition is satisfied when no score is stored in the auxiliary score storage means (the payout control unit side: 0 ball state). (See FIG. 73).

  According to such a configuration, since it is possible to determine that there is no score on the gaming device side and it is possible to determine that there is no score on the gaming machine side, the mode switching is allowed, so there is a score. It is possible to more reliably prevent mode switching from being performed.

(L1) The present invention is capable of playing with points (number of game balls, points), a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, A gaming system that includes a gaming device (CU) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine while adding points using gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.)
The gaming device is:
Game device-side condition determining means for determining whether or not the game device-side mode switching condition is satisfied (card unit side in FIG. 73; a command is transmitted only when the ball is in the 0 ball state);
Mode switching command information transmission for transmitting mode switching command information (mode change request) to the gaming machine when it is determined by the gaming device side condition determining means that the gaming device side mode switching condition is satisfied. Means (see FIG. 73),
The gaming machine is
Mode switching command information receiving means (see FIG. 73) for receiving the mode switching command information;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, the gaming machine side condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied (the payout control in FIG. 73). Part side: 0 yen 0 ball state, number of balls in game is 0, mode change response result from main control board is OK, main control board side of FIG. 80: symbol is not changing, not big hit, not small hit) When,
A business mode in which a player can play a game based on the mode switching command information when the gaming machine side condition determining means determines that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied. Mode switching means (FIG. 73, FIG. 80, FIG. 96) for switching between a sales mode for providing a game to a player) and a non-business mode (FIGS. 8 to 10; maintenance mode, test mode, trial hit mode). Reference).

  According to such a configuration, a gaming system having a high degree of cooperation between the gaming device and the gaming machine can be provided by switching the gaming device and the gaming machine to various modes in cooperation. Further, when it is determined that the gaming device side mode switching condition is satisfied on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side mode switching condition is determined on the gaming machine side, the mode switching is performed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the mode before and after the switching from being adversely affected by the unconditional switching of the mode.

(L2) In the gaming system according to (l1),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (payout control unit 17, added ball number counter, subtracted ball number counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
A point storage means for storing points (an area for storing the number of game balls on the CU side in FIGS. 6 and 104);
Update information receiving means (main control unit 323) for receiving the update information;
A score update means (main control unit 323, FIG. 6, FIG. 104) for updating the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information;
The game device-side condition determining means determines that the game device-side mode switching condition is satisfied when no score is stored in the score storage means (FIG. 73; 0 on the card unit side). Ball status determination).

(L3) In the gaming system according to (l1) (l2),
The gaming machine is
A variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means for controlling to a specific gaming state (big hit, big bonus) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display mode (a big hit mode of 777, a big bonus mode) Control board 16),
The gaming machine side condition determining means determines that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied when the variable display device is not performing variable display (FIG. 80; the symbol is not changing on the main control board side). Judgment).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the mode is switched during a game in which the variable display device performs variable display.

(L4) In the gaming system according to (l1) (l2),
The gaming machine is
A variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information;
Game control means for controlling to a specific gaming state (big hit, big bonus) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a specific display mode (a big hit mode of 777, a big bonus mode) Control board 16),
The gaming machine side condition determining means determines that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied when the specific gaming state is not being executed (see FIG. 80).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the mode is switched during the specific gaming state.

(L5) In the gaming system according to (l1) to (l4),
The gaming machine side condition determining means determines that the gaming machine side mode switching condition is satisfied when the game result is in a confirmed state (the number of balls in the game is 0) (see FIG. 73). ).

  According to such a configuration, the mode is switched when the game result is not fixed, and the game result before the switching is affected with respect to the mode after the switching. Can be prevented.

(M1) The present invention allows a game with points (the number of game balls, points), a gaming machine (P units, S units) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, A gaming system that includes a gaming device (CU) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine while adding points using gaming value (balance, savings, cash, etc.)
The gaming machine is
Display means (display device 54, display device) for displaying game machine information (see FIG. 82, FIG. 83; game ball total number information, back ball addition information, game ball firing number information,...) That changes as the game progresses. 510)
Display control means for controlling the display means (display control board 53),
Gaming machine information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming device;
Untransmitted information transmitting means for transmitting the gaming machine information as untransmitted information (CU untransmitted data display request, FIG. 86, FIG. 87) to the display control means when communication with the gaming device is impossible (See payout control unit 17, FIG. 95),
The gaming device is:
Gaming machine information storage means for storing the gaming machine information (storage area on the CU side in FIGS. 6 and 104);
Gaming machine information receiving means for receiving the gaming machine information (see FIGS. 6 and 104);
Game machine information updating means (FIGS. 6 and 104) for updating the gaming machine information stored in the gaming machine information storage means based on the gaming machine information received by the gaming machine information receiving means. ,
The display control means displays the untransmitted information transmitted from the untransmitted information transmitting means on the display means (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp information that has not been transmitted due to a communication disconnection between the gaming device and the gaming machine.

(M2) The present invention includes a connection unit for communicably connecting to a game device (CU) that adds points using game values (balance, savings, cash, etc.) owned by the player. A game machine (P units, S units) that can be played by points, and points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize,
Display means (display unit 54, display unit 510) for displaying gaming machine information that changes as the game progresses;
Display control means for controlling the display means (display control board 53),
Gaming machine information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting the gaming machine information to the gaming device;
Untransmitted information for transmitting the gaming machine information as untransmitted information (CU untransmitted data display request, FIG. 86, FIG. 87) to the display control means when communication with the gaming device is impossible Transmission means (payout control unit 17, see FIG. 95),
The display control means displays the untransmitted information transmitted from the untransmitted information transmitting means on the display means (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp information that has not been transmitted due to a communication disconnection between the gaming device and the gaming machine.

(M3) In the gaming system described in (m1),
The untransmitted information transmitting means repeatedly transmits the untransmitted information to the display control means until the communication status determining means determines that communication with the gaming device is possible (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, since the untransmitted information is repeatedly transmitted to the display control means, the retransmission of the untransmitted information to the gaming device side is completed while the display of the untransmitted information is continued. Therefore, it can be determined whether or not retransmission of untransmitted information to the gaming apparatus side has been completed.

(M4) In the gaming system according to (m1) (m3),
The display control means displays the untransmitted information in a state where the gaming machine information displayed on the display means before displaying the untransmitted information is stored in a predetermined storage area (FIG. 95; display Inside machine information data backup).

  According to such a configuration, by checking the information stored in the predetermined storage area, it is possible to specify gaming machine information when a communication interruption occurs.

(M5) In the gaming system according to (m4),
When the display control means is able to communicate with the gaming device, the display control means reflects information that reflects the unsent information being displayed on the gaming machine information stored in the storage area. It is displayed on the display means (FIG. 95; gaming machine information reflecting gaming machine information notification information and unsent data being displayed is displayed on the backup data).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the display content of the display means to the latest after recovery from the communication interruption.

(M6) In the gaming system according to (m4) (m5),
The gaming machine is
Holding point control means (payout control unit 17) including the gaming machine information transmission means, the communication state determination means, and the untransmitted information transmission means;
Game control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming state and transmitting an added value of the score according to the occurrence of winning (the number of prize balls in FIG. 75) to the score control means,
The holding point control means determines the added value transmitted from the game control means after the communication state determination means determines that the communication with the gaming device has become impossible. Including the gaming machine information to the gaming device and the display control means (notifying gaming machine information at the end of the sequence diagram of FIG. 95),
When the gaming machine information is transmitted from the holding point control means after the untransmitted information is transmitted, the display control means displays the gaming machine information and the untransmitted information being displayed. Information reflected on the gaming machine information stored in the storage area is displayed on the display means (see FIG. 95).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the display content of the display means to the latest after recovery from the communication interruption.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control part, 20 connection part, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 312 display, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit 321 rent button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 380 connection unit, 292 display effect control unit, 54 display device.

Claims (2)

The game can be played with points, the points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and the points are scored using the enclosed game machine having a circulation path for circulating the game media and the game value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device for adding and communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming device includes mode switching command information transmitting means for transmitting mode switching command information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine includes mode switching means for switching between a sales mode and a non-business mode in which a player can play a game based on the received mode switching command information,
The mode switching means is a maintenance mode in which parameters can be set when collecting game history data of a player in the sales mode, and the normality of the operation is confirmed for each part by partially operating the gaming machine. A gaming system for switching to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information among a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode that can be performed. It is equipped with a connection part to connect to a gaming device that adds points using the game value owned by the player so that it can communicate, and points can be added according to the occurrence of winnings. An enclosed game machine having a circulation path for circulating a game medium,
Mode switching command information receiving means for receiving predetermined mode switching command information from the gaming device;
When the mode switching command information is received by the mode switching command information receiving means, based on the received mode switching command information, a business mode and a non-business mode in which a player can play a game Mode switching means for switching to either
The mode switching means checks the normality of each part of the maintenance mode in which parameters for collecting game data of the player in the sales mode can be set and the operation of the gaming machine partially. A gaming machine that switches to the non-business mode based on the mode switching command information among a plurality of types of non-business modes including a test mode that can be used.

Images